GRD110 5xxx 6F2S0858 0.1r

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION RELAY
GRD110-5A
© Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2017

All Rights Reserved.
( Ver.0.1)
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Safety Precautions
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GRD110. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.
Explanation of symbols used

Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and two kinds of CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or

serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or

serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
minor injury or moderate injury.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
 1 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
DANGER
 Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.
WARNING
 Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage generated
is dangerous.
 Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.
It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
 Fiber optic
Do not view directly with optical instruments.
CAUTION
 Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
 Operating environment
The equipment must only used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and dust
detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
 Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.
 Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
 Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
 DC power
If dc power has not been supplied to the relay for two days or more, then all fault records, event
records and disturbance records and internal clock may be cleared soon after restoring the power.
This is because the back-up RAM may have discharged and may contain uncertain data.
 Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
 2 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 Short-link
Do not remove a short-link which is mounted at the terminal block on the rear of the relay before
shipment, as this may cause the performance of this equipment such as withstand voltage, etc., to
reduce.
 Disposal
When disposing of this equipment, do so in a safe manner according to local regulations.
 3 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Contents
Safety Precautions 1
1. Introduction 8
2. Application Notes 11
2.1 Phase Overcurrent and Residual Overcurrent Protection 11
2.1.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection 11
2.1.2 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection 14
2.1.3 Scheme Logic 15
2.1.4 Settings 16
2.2 Instantaneous and Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection 19
2.2.1 Selective Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection 19
2.2.2 Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection 20
2.2.4 Setting 23
2.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection 25
2.4 Phase Undercurrent Protection 32
2.5 Thermal Overload Protection 34
2.6 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection 37
2.7 Broken Conductor Protection 39
2.8 Breaker Failure Protection 42
2.9 Countermeasures for Magnetising Inrush 45
2.9.1 Inrush Current Detector 45
2.9.2 Cold Load Protection 46
2.10 Trip Signal Output 49
2.11 Application of Protection Inhibits 52
2.11.1 Blocked Overcurrent Protection 52
2.11.2 Blocked Busbar Protection 53
2.12 CT Requirements 54
2.12.1 Phase Fault and Earth Fault Protection 54
2.12.2 Minimum Knee Point Voltage 54
2.12.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection 55
2.12.4 Restricted Earth Fault Protection 55
2.13 Autoreclose 56
2.13.2 Sequence Coordination 58
2.13.3 Setting 60
3. Technical Description 62
3.1 Hardware Description 62
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules 62
3.2 Input and Output Signals 66
3.2.1 AC Input Signals 66
 4 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals 66

3.2.3 Binary Output Signals 69
3.3 Automatic Supervision 70
3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision 70
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring 70
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision 71
3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring 72
3.3.5 Failure Alarms 73
3.3.6 Trip Blocking 74
3.3.7 Setting 74
3.4 Recording Function 75
3.4.1 Fault Recording 75
3.4.2 Event Recording 76
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording 76
3.5 Metering Function 78
4. User Interface 79
4.1 Outline of User Interface 79
4.1.1 Front Panel 79
4.1.2 Communication Ports 81
4.2 Operation of the User Interface 82
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays 82
4.2.2 Relay Menu 85
4.2.3 Displaying Records 87
4.2.4 Displaying the Status 91
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings 95
4.2.6 Changing the Settings 96
4.2.7 Testing 130
4.3 Personal Computer Interface 132
4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System 132
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface 133
4.6 Clock Function 133
5. Installation 134
5.1 Receipt of Relays 134
5.2 Relay Mounting 134
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge 134
5.4 Handling Precautions 134
5.5 External Connections 135
6. Commissioning and Maintenance 136
6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests 136
6.2 Cautions 137
6.2.1 Safety Precautions 137
6.2.2 Cautions on Tests 137
6.3 Preparations 138
 5 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
6.4 Hardware Tests 139

6.4.1 User Interfaces 139
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit 139
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit 140
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits 141
6.5 Function Test 142
6.5.1 Measuring Element 142
6.5.2 Protection Scheme 151
6.5.3 Metering and Recording 151
6.6 Conjunctive Tests 152
6.6.1 On Load Test 152
6.6.2 Tripping Circuit Test 152
6.7 Maintenance 154
6.7.1 Regular Testing 154
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair 154
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit 155
6.7.4 Resumption of Service 156
6.7.5 Storage 156
7. Putting Relay into Service 157
 6 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix A Programmable Reset Characteristics and Implementation of Thermal

Model to IEC60255-8 159
Appendix B Signal List 163
Appendix C Event Record Items 169
Appendix D Binary Output Default Setting List 175
Appendix E Details of Relay Menu and LCD & Button Operation 177
Appendix F Case Outline 191
Appendix G Typical External Connection 193
Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet 201
Appendix I Commissioning Test Sheet (sample) 211
Appendix J Return Repair Form 215
Appendix K Technical Data 221
Appendix L Symbols Used in Scheme Logic 227
Appendix M IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability 231
Appendix N Inverse Time Characteristics 239
Appendix O Ordering 245
 The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice. (Ver.0.1)
 7 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
1. Introduction
GRD110 series relays provide non-directional overcurrent protection for radial distribution
networks, and back-up protection for transmission and distribution networks.
Note: GRD110 series relays are non-directional, and are applicable to systems where a fault current
flows in a fixed direction, or flows in both directions but there is a significant difference in
magnitude. In systems where a fault current flows in both directions and there is not a significant
difference in the magnitude of the fault current, the directional overcurrent protection provided by
GRD140 facilitates fault selectivity.
The GRD110-500 series has two models and provides the following protection schemes in all
models.
 Overcurrent protection for phase and earth faults with definite time or inverse time
characteristics
 Instantaneous overcurrent protection for phase and earth faults
The GRD110-500 series provides the following protection schemes depending on the models.
 Sensitive earth fault protection
 Undercurrent protection
 Thermal overload protection
 Negative phase sequence overcurrent protection
 Broken conductor detection
 Circuit breaker failure protection
 Countermeasures for magnetising inrush
 Blocked overcurrent and blocked busbar protection
The GRD110-500 series provides the following functions for all models.
 Four settings groups
 Autoreclosing function
 Configurable binary inputs and outputs
 Circuit breaker condition monitoring
 Trip circuit supervision
 Automatic self-supervision
 Menu-based HMI system
 Configurable LED indication
 Metering and recording functions
 Front mounted RS232 serial port for local PC communications
 Rear mounted one or two RS485 serial ports for remote PC communications
Table 1.1.1 shows the members of the GRD110-500 series and identifies the functions to be
provided by each member.
 8 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions

: Scheme switch [APPL] setting
Model Number GRD110 -

500 520
3P 2P 1P 3P 2P 1P
Current input 3P + E 2P + E E 3P + E(*) + SE 2P + E + SE E + SE
IDMT O/C (OC1, OC2)    
DT O/C (OC1 – 4)    
Instantaneous O/C (OC1 – 4)    
IDMT O/C (EF1, EF2)      
DT O/C (EF1 – 4)      
Instantaneous O/C (EF1 – 4)      
SEF protection   
Phase U/C    
Thermal O/L    
NPS O/C  
Broken conductor protection  
CBF protection  
Cold load protection    
Inrush current detector      
Autoreclose      
Trip circuit supervision      
Self supervision      
CB state monitoring      
Trip counter alarm      
Iy alarm  
CB operate time alarm      
Multiple settings groups      
Metering      
Fault records      
Event records      
Disturbance records      
Communication      
E: current from residual circuit
E(*): current (Io) calculated from three-phase current in relay internal
SE: current from core balance CT
3P: three-phase current
2P: two-phase current
IDMT: inverse definite minimum time
 9 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
DT: definite time

O/C: overcurrent protection
OC: phase overcurrent element
EF: earth fault element
SEF: sensitive earth fault
U/C: undercurrent protection
O/L: overload protection
NPS: negative phase sequence
CBF: circuit breaker failure
Model 500 provides three-phase or two-phase phase protection and earth fault protection or earth
fault protection depending on the scheme switch [APPL] setting.
Model 520 provides three-phase or two-phase phase protection and earth and sensitive earth
protection or earth and sensitive earth fault protection depending on the scheme switch [APPL]
setting.
 10 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2. Application Notes
2.1 Phase Overcurrent and Residual Overcurrent Protection
GRD110 provides radial distribution network protection with phase fault and earth fault
overcurrent elements OC1, OC2, EF1 and EF2 for stage-1 and stage-2, which have selective
inverse time and definite time characteristics. The protection of local and downstream terminals is
coordinated with the current setting, time setting, or both.
Note: OC1, OC2, EF1 and EF2 elements that have inverse time or definite time characteristics are
discriminated with OC1-I, OC2-I, EF1-I and EF2-I or OC1-D, OC2-D, EF1-D and EF2-D
respectively.
2.1.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection
In a system for which the fault current is practically determined by the fault location, without
being substantially affected by changes in the power source impedance, it is advantageous to use
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) overcurrent protection. This protection provides
reasonably fast tripping, even at a terminal close to the power source where the most severe faults
can occur.
Where ZS (the impedance between the relay and the power source) is small compared with that of
the protected section ZL, there is an appreciable difference between the current for a fault at the
far end of the section (ES/(ZS+ZL), ES: source voltage), and the current for a fault at the near end
(ES/ZS). When operating time is inversely proportional to the current, the relay operates faster for
a fault at the end of the section nearer the power source, and the operating time ratio for a fault at
the near end to the far end is ZS/(ZS + ZL).
The resultant time-distance characteristics are shown in Figure 2.1.1 for radial networks with
several feeder sections. With the same selective time coordination margin TC as the download
section, the operating time can be further reduced by using a more inverse characteristic.
Operate time
TC
TC
A B C
Figure 2.1.1 Time-distance Characteristics of Inverse Time Protection
The OC1-I and EF1-I have the IDMT characteristics defined by equation (1):
  
   c
t  TMS  
k
 
 
 I 
 Is
 1 
 
(1)
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
I = energising current (amps),
 11 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Is = overcurrent setting (amps),

TMS = time multiplier setting,
k, , c = constants defining curve.
Nine curve types are available as defined in Table 2.1.1. They are illustrated in Figure 2.1.2.
In addition to the above nine curve types, the OC1-I and EF1-I can provides user configurable
IDMT curve. If required, set the scheme switch [M] to “C” and set the curve defining
constants k,  and c. The following table shows the setting ranges of the curve defining constants.
OC2-I and EF2-I for stage-2 also provide the same inverse time protection as OC1-I and EF1-I.
IEC/UK Inverse Curves IEEE/US Inverse Curves

(Time Multiplier = 1) (Time Multiplier = 1)
1000 100
100
10
Operating Time (s)
Operating Time (s)
10
LTI
NI 1
MI
1 VI
VI
CO2
CO8
EI
EI
0.1 0.1
1 10 100 1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting) Current (Multiple of Setting)
Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristics
Programmable Reset Characteristics

OC1-I, OC2-I, EF1-I and EF2-I have a programmable reset feature: instantaneous, definite time
delayed, or dependent time delayed reset. (Refer to Appendix A for a more detailed description.)
Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure
correct grading between relays at various points in the scheme.
The inverse reset characteristic is particularly useful for providing correct coordination with an
upstream induction disc type overcurrent relay.
The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of
intermittent (‘pecking’ or ‘flashing’) fault conditions.
Definite time reset

The definite time resetting characteristic is applied to the IEC/IEEE/US operating characteristics.
If definite time resetting is selected, and the delay period is set to instantaneous, then no
intentional delay is added. As soon as the energising current falls below the reset threshold, the
 12 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
element returns to its reset condition.

If the delay period is set to some value in seconds, then an intentional delay is added to the reset
period. If the energising current exceeds the setting for a transient period without causing
tripping, then resetting is delayed for a user-definable period. When the energising current falls
below the reset threshold, the integral state (the point towards operation that it has travelled) of
the timing function (IDMT) is held for that period.
This does not apply following a trip operation, in which case resetting is always instantaneous.
Dependent time reset

The dependent time resetting characteristic is applied only to the IEEE/US operate
characteristics, and is defined by the following equation:
 
 kr 
t  RTMS    (2)

 I  
1 
  I S  
 
where:
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energising current (amps),
Is = overcurrent setting (amps),
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energising current is zero
(see Table 2.1.1),
RTMS = reset time multiplier setting.
k, , c = constants defining curve.
Figure 2.1.3 illustrates the dependent time reset characteristics.

The dependent time reset characteristic also can provide user configurable IDMT curve. If
required, set the scheme switch [M] to “C” and set the curve defining constants kr and .
Table 2.1.1 shows the setting ranges of the curve defining constants.
Table 2.1.1 Specification of IDMT Curves
Curve Description IEC ref. k  c kr 

IEC Normal Inverse A 0.14 0.02 0 - -
IEC Very Inverse B 13.5 1 0 - -
IEC Extremely Inverse C 80 2 0 - -
UK Long Time Inverse - 120 1 0 - -
IEEE Moderately Inverse D 0.0515 0.02 0.114 4.85 2
IEEE Very Inverse E 19.61 2 0.491 21.6 2
IEEE Extremely Inverse F 28.2 2 0.1217 29.1 2
US CO8 Inverse - 5.95 2 0.18 5.95 2
US CO2 Short Time Inverse - 0.02394 0.02 0.01694 2.261 2
User configurable curve - 0.00 – 0.00 – 0.000 – 0.00 – 0.00 –
300.00 5.00 5.000 300.00 5.00
Note: kr and  are used to define the reset characteristic. Refer to equation (2).
 13 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
IEEE Reset Curves

(Time Multiplier = 1)
1000.00
100.00
Time (s)
EI
VI
10.00
CO8
MI
CO2
1.00
0.1 1
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Figure 2.1.3 Dependent Time Reset Characteristics
2.1.2 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
In a system in which the fault current does not vary a great deal in relation to the position of the
fault, that is, the impedance between the relay and the power source is large, the advantages of the
IDMT characteristics are not fully utilised. In this case, definite time overcurrent protection is
applied. The operating time can be constant irrespective of the magnitude of the fault current.
The definite time overcurrent protection consists of instantaneous overcurrent measuring
elements OC1 and EF1 and delayed pick-up timers started by the elements, and provides selective
protection with graded setting of the delayed pick-up timers. Thus, the constant time coordination
with the downstream section can be maintained as shown in Figure 2.1.4 As is clear in the figure,
the nearer to the power source a section is, the greater the delay in the tripping time of the section.
This is undesirable particularly where there are many sections in the series.
Operate time
TC
TC
A B C
Figure 2.1.4 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
 14 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.1.3 Scheme Logic
Figure 2.1.5 and Figure 2.1.6 show the scheme logic of the phase fault and earth fault overcurrent
protection with selective definite time or inverse time characteristic.
The definite time protection is selected by setting [MOC1] and [MEF1] to “DT”. Definite time
overcurrent elements OC1-D and EF1-D are enabled for phase fault and earth fault protection
respectively, and trip signal OC1 TRIP and EF1 TRIP are given through the delayed pick-up timer
TOC1 and TEF1.
The inverse time protection is selected by setting [MOC1] and [MEF1] to either “IEC”, “IEEE” or
“US” according to the IDMT characteristic to employ. Inverse time overcurrent elements OC1-I
and EF1-I are enabled for phase fault and earth fault protection respectively, and trip signal OC1
TRIP and EF1 TRIP are given.
The signals OC1 HS and EF1 HS are used for blocked overcurrent protection and blocked busbar
protection (refer to Section 2.11).
These protections can be disabled by the scheme switches [OC1EN] and [EF1EN] or binary input
signals OC1 BLOCK and EF1 BLOCK.
ICD is the inrush current detector ICD, which detects second harmonic inrush current during
transformer energisation, and can block the OC1-D and EF1-D elements by the scheme switch
[OC1-2F] and [EF1-2F]. See Section 2.9.
The signal OC1_INST and EF1_INST are available to trip instantaneously for a fault such as a
recluse-on-to-a-fault. (See Section 2.13)
OC2 and EF2 are provided with the same logic of OC1 and EF1. However, HS signals for blocked
overcurrent protection and blocked busbar protection are not provided.
TOC1
A t 0 102
& OC1-A TRIP
OC1 1
B 103
-D t 0 OC1-B TRIP
&
C 1
t 0 104
& OC1-C TRIP
1
[OC1-2F] 0.00 - 300.00s
+ "Block" 101
ICD
& & 1 OC1 TRIP
OC1_INST &
[MOC1] &
+
"DT"
51
OC1-A
"IEC" 1
52
OC1-B
"IEEE" 1
53
"US" OC1-C
1
"C"
A
&
OC1
B
-I &
C
& 88
[OC1EN] A OC1-A HS
+ 89
"ON" & OC1HS B OC1-B HS
90
OC1 BLOCK 1 C OC1-C HS
Figure 2.1.5 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection OC1
 15 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
TEF1
EF1-D t 0 117
& EF1 TRIP
1
0.00 - 300.00s
[EF1-2F]
+ "Block"
&
ICD
&
EF1_INST
[MEF1]
+
"DT"
63
EF1
"IEC" 1
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
EF1-I &
[EF1EN]
+
"ON" &
91
EF1HS EF1 HS
EF1 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.1.6 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection EF1
2.1.4 Settings
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the phase and residual overcurrent protection
and their setting ranges.
Element Range Step Default Remarks
OC1 0.2 – 25.0 A 0.1 A 5.0 A OC1 threshold setting
(0.04 – 5.00 A)(*1) (0.01 A) (1.00 A)
TOC1 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 OC1 time multiplier setting. Required if
[MOC1] = IEC, IEEE, US or C.
0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s OC1 definite time setting. Required if
[MOC1] = DT.
TOC1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OC1 definite time delayed reset. Required
if [MOC1] = IEC or if [OC1R] = DEF.
TOC1RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 OC1 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [OC1R] = DEP.
EF1 0.1 – 25.0 A 0.1 A 1.5 A EF1 threshold setting
(0.02 – 5.00 A) (0.01 A) (0.30 A)
TEF1 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 EF1 time multiplier setting. Required if
[MEF1] = IEC, IEEE, US or C.
0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s EF1 definite time setting. Required if
[MEF1] =DT.
TEF1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s EF1 definite time delayed reset. Required
if [MEF1] = IEC or if [EF1R] = DEF.
TEF1RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 EF1 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [EF1R] = DEP.
[OC1EN] Off / On On OC1 Enable
 16 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

[MOC1] DT / IEC / IEEE / US / C DT OC1 characteristic
[MOC1C] OC1 inverse curve type.
MOC1C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MOC1] = IEC.
MOC1C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MOC1] = IEEE.
MOC1C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MOC1] = US.
[OC1R] DEF / DEP DEF OC1 reset characteristic. Required if
[MOC1] = IEEE or US.
[OC1-2F] NA / Block NA OC1 blocked by inrush current
[EF1EN] Off / On On EF1 Enable
[MEF1] DT / IEC / IEEE / US / C DT EF1 characteristic
[MEF1C] EF1 inverse curve type.
MEF1C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MEF1] = IEC.
MEF1C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MEF1] = IEEE.
MEF1C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MEF1] = US.
[EF1R] DEF / DEP DEF EF1 reset characteristic. Required if
[MEF1] = IEEE or US.
[EF1-2F] NA / Block NA EF1 blocked by inrush current
[Optime] Normal / Fast(*2) Normal Operating time selection for all OC and EF
elements
(*1) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in
the case of a 5 A rating.
(*2) If high-speed operation of OC and EF is required for time coordination with other relays or
protections, “Fast” can be selected. When “Fast” selected, all OC and EF elements operate at
high-speed ( approximately 20ms).
Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent protection

Current setting
In Figure 2.1.7, the current setting at terminal A is set lower than the minimum fault current in the
event of a fault at remote end F1. Furthermore, when also considering backup protection for a
fault on the next feeder section, it is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a
fault at remote end F3.
To calculate the minimum fault current, phase-to-phase faults are assumed for the phase
overcurrent element, and phase to earth faults for residual overcurrent element, assuming the
probable maximum source impedance. When considering the fault at F3, the remote end of the
next section is assumed to be open.
The higher the current setting, the more effective the inverse characteristic. On the other hand, the
lower the setting, the more dependable the operation. The setting is normally 1 to 1.5 times or less
of the minimum fault current.
For grading of the current settings, the terminal furthest from the power source is set to the lowest
value and the terminals closer to the power source are set to a higher value.
The minimum setting of the phase overcurrent element is restricted so as not to operate for the
maximum load current, and that of the residual overcurrent element is restricted so as to not
operate on false zero-sequence current caused by an unbalance in the load current, errors in the
current transformer circuits, or zero-sequence mutual coupling of parallel lines.
 17 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
A B C
F1 F2 F3
Figure 2.1.7 Current Settings in Radial Feeder
Time setting
Time setting is performed to provide selectivity in relation to the relays on adjacent feeders.
Consider a minimum source impedance when the current flowing through the relay reaches a
maximum. In Figure 2.1.7, in the event of a fault at F2, the operating time is set so that terminal A
may operate by time grading Tc behind terminal B. The current flowing in the relays may
sometimes be greater when the remote end of the adjacent line is open. At this time, time
coordination must also be kept.
The reason why the operating time is set when the fault current reaches a maximum is that if time
coordination is obtained for a large fault current, then time coordination can also be obtained for
the small fault current as long as relays with the same operating characteristic are used for each
terminal.
The grading margin Tc of terminal A and terminal B is given by the following expression for a
fault at point F2 in Figure 2.1.7.
Tc = T1 + T2 + Tm
where, T1: circuit breaker clearance time at B
T2: relay reset time at A
Tm: time margin
Settings of Definite Time Overcurrent protection

Current setting
The current setting is set lower than the minimum fault current in the event of a fault at the remote
end of the protected feeder section. Furthermore, when also considering backup protection for a
fault in a next feeder section, it is set lower than the minimum fault current, in the event of a fault
at the remote end of the next feeder section.
Identical current values can be set for terminals, but graded settings are better than identical
settings, in order to provide a margin for current sensitivity. The farther from the power source the
terminal is located, the higher the sensitivity (i.e. the lower setting) that is required.
The minimum setting of the phase overcurrent element is restricted so as not to operate for the
maximum load current, and that of the residual overcurrent element is restricted so as to not
operate on false zero-sequence current caused by an unbalance in the load current, errors in the
current transformer circuits, or zero-sequence mutual coupling of parallel lines. Taking the
selection of instantaneous operation into consideration, the settings must be high enough not to
operate for large motor starting currents or transformer inrush currents.
Time setting
When setting the delayed pick-up timers, the time grading margin Tc is obtained in the same way
as explained in “Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection”.
 18 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.2 Instantaneous and Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

In conjunction with inverse time overcurrent protection, definite time overcurrent elements OC2
to OC4 and EF2 to EF4 provide instantaneous overcurrent protection. OC2 and EF2 also provide
the same inverse time protection as OC1 and EF1.
OC2 to OC4 and EF2 to EF4 are phase fault and earth fault protection elements, respectively.
Each element is programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation. The phase
fault elements operate on a phase segregated basis, although tripping is for three phase only.
2.2.1 Selective Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
When they are applied to radial networks with several feeder sections where ZL (impedance of
the protected line) is large enough compared with ZS (the impedance between the relay and the
power source), and the magnitude of the fault current in the local end fault is much greater (3
times or more, or (ZL+ZS)/ZS≧3, for example) than that in the remote end fault under the
condition that ZS is maximum, the pick-up current can be set sufficiently high so that the
operating zone of the elements do not reach the remote end of the feeder, and thus instantaneous
and selective protection can be applied.
This high setting overcurrent protection is applicable and effective particularly for feeders near
the power source where the setting is feasible, but the longest tripping times would otherwise
have to be accepted.
As long as the associated inverse time overcurrent protection is correctly coordinated, the
instantaneous protection does not require setting coordination with the downstream section.
Figure 2.2.1 shows operating times for instantaneous overcurrent protection in conjunction with
inverse time overcurrent protection. The shaded area shows the reduction in operating time by
applying the instantaneous overcurrent protection. The instantaneous protection zone decreases
as ZS increases.
Operate time
TC
TC
A B C
Figure 2.2.1 Conjunction of Inverse and Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection
The current setting is set 1.3 to 1.5 times higher than the probable maximum fault current in the
event of a fault at the remote end. The maximum fault current for elements OC2 to OC4 is
obtained in case of three-phase faults, while the maximum fault current for elements EF2 to EF4
is obtained in the event of single phase earth faults.
 19 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.2.2 Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
When applying inverse time overcurrent protection for a feeder system as shown in Figure 2.2.2,
well coordinated protection with the fuses in branch circuit faults and high-speed protection for
the feeder faults can be provided by adding staged definite time overcurrent protection with
time-graded OC2 and OC3 or EF2 and EF3 elements.
Fuse
GRD110
Figure 2.2.2 Feeder Protection Coordinated with Fuses
Configuring the inverse time element OC1 (and EF1) and time graded elements OC2 and OC3
(or EF2 and EF3) as shown in Figure 2.2.3, the characteristic of overcurrent protection can be
improved to coordinate with the fuse characteristic.
Time (s)
OC1
OC2
OC3
Fuse
Current (amps)
Figure 2.2.3 Staged Definite Time Protection
 20 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.2.3 Scheme Logic
As shown in Figure 2.2.4 to Figure 2.2.9, OC2 to OC4 and EF2 to EF4 have independent scheme
logics. OC2 and EF2 provide the same logic of OC1 and EF1. OC3 and EF3 give trip signals OC3
TRIP and EF3 TRIP through delayed pick-up timers TOC3 and TEF3. The signal OC_INST and
EF_INST are available to trip instantaneously for a fault such as a recluse-on-to-a-fault. (See
Section 2.13) OC4 and EF4 are used to output alarm signals OC4 ALARM and EF4 ALARM.
Each trip and alarm can be blocked by incorporated scheme switches [OC2EN] to [EF4EN] and
binary input signals OC2 BLOCK to EF4 BLOCK. OC-D and EF-D elements can be also
blocked by the scheme switches [OC-2F] and [EF-2F]. See Section 2.9.
TOC2
A t 0 106
& OC2-A TRIP
OC2 1
B 107
-D t 0 OC2-B TRIP
&
C 1
t 0 108
& OC2-C TRIP
1
[OC2-2F] 0.00 - 300.00s
+ "Block" 105
ICD
& & 1 OC2 TRIP
OC2_INST &
[MOC2] &
+
"DT"
54
OC2-A
"IEC" 1
55
OC2-B
"IEEE" 1
56
"US" OC2-C
1
"C"
A
&
OC2
B
-I &
C
&
[OC2EN]
+
"ON" &
OC2 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.2.4 Phase Overcurrent Protection OC2
TOC3
57
A t 0 110
& OC3-A TRIP
58 1
OC3 B t 0 111
59 & OC3-B TRIP
C 1
& t 0 112
OC3-C TRIP
1
[OC3-2F] 0.00 - 300.00s
109
+ "Block" 1 OC3 TRIP
& &
ICD
OC3-INST &
[OC3EN] &
+
"ON" &
OC3 BLOCK 1
 21 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
TOC4
60
A t 0 114
& OC4-A ALARM
61 1
OC4 B t 0 115
62 & OC4-B ALARM
C 1
& t 0 116
OC4-C ALARM
1
[OC4-2F] 0.00 - 300.00s
113
+ "Block" 1 OC4 ALARM
& &
ICD
OC4_INST &
[OC4EN] &
+
"ON" &
OC4 BLOCK 1
TEF2
EF2-D t 0 118
& EF2 TRIP
1
0.00 - 300.00s
[EF2-2F]
+ "Block"
&
ICD
&
EF2_INST
[MEF2]
+
"DT"
64
EF2
"IEC" 1
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
EF2-I &
[EF2EN]
+
"ON" &
EF2 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.2.7 Earth fault Protection EF2
TEF3
65
EF3 t 0 119
& EF3 TRIP
1
0.00 - 300.00s
[EF3-2F]
+ "Block"
&
ICD
EF3_INST &
[EF3EN]
+
"ON" &
EF3 BLOCK 1
 22 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
66 TEF4
EF4 t 0 120
& EF4 ALARM
1
0.00 - 300.00s
[EF4-2F]
+ "Block"
&
ICD
EF4_INST &
[EF4EN]
+
"ON" &
EF4 BLOCK 1
2.2.4 Setting
The table shows the setting elements necessary for the instantaneous and definite time
overcurrent protection and their setting ranges.
(0.04 – 50.00 A)(*1) (0.01 A) (5.00 A)
TOC2 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 OC2 time multiplier setting. Required if
[MOC2] = IEC, IEEE, US or C.
0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s OC2 definite time setting.
TOC2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s OC2 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MOC2] = IEC or if [OC2R] = DEF.
TOC2RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 OC2 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [OC2R] = DEP.
(0.10 – 50.00 A) (0.01 A) (10.00 A)
TOC3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s OC3 definite time setting.
(0.10 – 50.00 A) (0.01 A) (20.00 A)
TOC4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s OC4definite time setting.
(0.02 – 50.00 A) (0.01 A) (3.00 A)
TEF2 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 EF2 time multiplier setting. Required if
[MEF2] = IEC, IEEE, US or C.
0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s EF2 definite time setting.
TEF2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s EF2 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MEF2] = IEC or if [EF2R] = DEF.
TEF2RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 EF2 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [EF2R] = DEP.
(0.04 – 50.00 A) (0.01 A) (5.00 A)
TEF3 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s EF3 definite time setting.
 23 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

(0.04 – 50.00 A) (0.01 A) (10.00 A)
TEF4 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s EF4 definite time setting.
[OC2EN] Off / On Off OC2 Enable
[MOC2] DT / IEC / IEEE / US / C DT OC2 characteristic
[MOC2C] OC2 inverse curve type.
MOC2C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MOC2] = IEC.
MOC2C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MOC2] = IEEE.
MOC2C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MOC2] = US.
[OC2R] DEF / DEP DEF OC2 reset characteristic. Required if [MOC2]
= IEEE or US.
[EF2EN] Off / On Off EF2 Enable
[MEF2] DT / IEC / IEEE / US / C DT EF2 characteristic
[MEF2C] EF2 inverse curve type.
MEF2C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MEF2] = IEC.
MEF2C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MEF2] = IEEE.
MEF2C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MEF2] = US.
[EF2R] DEF / DEP DEF OC2 reset characteristic. Required if [MEF2]
= IEEE or US.
[Optime] Normal / Fast(*2) Normal Operating time selection for all OC and EF
elements
(*1) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in
(*2) If high-speed operation of OC and EF is required for time coordination with other relays or
protections, “Fast” can be selected. When “Fast” selected, all OC and EF elements operate at
high-speed (approximately 20ms).
 24 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection

The sensitive earth fault (SEF) protection is applied for distribution systems earthed through
high impedance, where very low levels of fault current are expected in earth faults. Furthermore,
the SEF elements of GRD110 are also applicable to the “standby earth fault protection” and the
“high impedance restricted earth fault protection of transformers”.
The SEF elements provide more sensitive setting ranges (10 mA to 1 A in 5A rating) than the
regular earth fault protection.
Since very low levels of current setting may be applied, there is a danger of unwanted operation
due to harmonics of the power system frequency, which can appear as residual current. Therefore
the SEF elements operate only on the fundamental component, rejecting all higher harmonics.
The SEF protection is provided in Model 520 which has a dedicated earth fault input circuit.
The element SEF1 provides inverse time or definite time selective two-stage earth fault
protection and SEF2 to SEF4 provide definite time earth fault protection. Stage 2 of the
two-stage earth fault protection is used only for the standby earth fault protection.
Note: The element SEF1 is discriminated into SEF1-I or SEF1-D depending on inverse time or
definite time characteristic selected.
When SEF-I employs IEEE or USA inverse time characteristics, two reset modes are available:
definite time or dependent time resetting. If the IEC inverse time characteristic is employed,
definite time resetting is provided. For other characteristics, refer to Section 2.1.1.
In applications of SEF protection, it must be ensured that any erroneous zero-phase current is
sufficiently low compared to the fault current, so that a highly sensitive setting is available.
The erroneous current may be caused with load current due to unbalanced configuration of the
distribution lines, or mutual coupling from adjacent lines. The value of the erroneous current
during normal conditions can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay front panel.
The earth fault current for SEF may be fed from a core balance CT, but if it is derived from three
phase CTs, the erroneous current may be caused also by the CT error in phase faults. Transient
false functioning may be prevented by a relatively long time delay.
Standby earth fault protection

The SEF is energised from a CT connected in the power transformer low voltage neutral, and the
standby earth fault protection trips the transformer to backup the low voltage feeder protection,
and ensures that the neutral earthing resistor is not loaded beyond its rating. Stage 1 trips the
transformer low voltage circuit breaker, then stage 2 trips the high voltage circuit breaker(s) with
a time delay after stage 1 operates.
The time graded tripping is valid for transformers connected to a ring bus, banked transformers
and feeder transformers.
Restricted earth fault protection

The SEF elements can be applied in a high impedance restricted earth fault scheme (REF), for
protection of a star-connected transformer winding whose neutral is earthed directly or through
impedance.
As shown in Figure 2.3.1, the differential current between the residual current derived from the
three-phase feeder currents and the neutral current in the neutral conductor is introduced into the
SEF elements. Two external components, a stabilising resistor and a varistor, are connected as
shown in the figure. The former increases the overall impedance of the relay circuit and stabilises
 25 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
the differential voltage, and the latter suppresses any overvoltage in the differential circuit.
Power
Transformer
Varistor
Stabilising GRD110
Resistor SEF input
Figure 2.3.1 High Impedance REF
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.3.2 to Figure 2.3.5 show the scheme logic of inverse time or definite time selective earth
fault protection and definite time earth fault protection.
In Figures 2.3.2 and 2.3.3, the definite time protection is selected by setting [MSE1] and [MSE2]
to “DT”. The element SEF1 is enabled for sensitive earth fault protection and stage 1 trip signal
SEF1-S1 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TSE1. The element SEF2 is enabled
and trip signal SEF2 TRIP is given through the delayed pick-up timer TSE2.
The inverse time protection is selected by setting [MSE1] and [MSE2] to either “IEC”, “IEEE”,
“US” or “C” according to the inverse time characteristic to employ. The element SEF1 is enabled
and stage 1 trip signal SEF1-S1 TRIP is given. The element SEF2 is enabled and trip signal SEF2
TRIP is given.
The SEF1 protection provide stage 2 trip signal SEF1-S2 through a delayed pick-up timer TSE1
S2.
When the standby earth fault protection is applied by introducing earth current from the
transformer low voltage neutral circuit, stage 1 trip signals are used to trip the transformer low
voltage circuit breaker. If SEF1-D or SEF1-I continues operating after stage 1 has operated, the
stage 2 trip signal can be used to trip the transformer high voltage circuit breaker(s).
The signal SEF1 HS is used for blocked overcurrent protection and blocked busbar protection
(refer to Section 2.11).
SEF protection can be disabled by the scheme switch [SE1EN] and [SE2EN] or binary input
signal SEF1 BLOCK and SEF2 BLOCK. Stage 2 trip of standby earth fault protection can be
disabled by the scheme switch [SE1S2].
transformer energisation, and can block the SEF-D element by the scheme switch [SE-2F]. See
Section 2.9.
In Figures 2.3.4 and 2.3.5, SEF3 and SEF4 protections are programmable for instantaneous or
definite time delayed operations with setting of delayed pick-up timers TSE3 and TSE4 and give
 26 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
trip signals SEF3 TRIP and SEF4 ALARM. The SEF3 and SEF4 can be also blocked by the
scheme switch [SEEN], [SE-2F] or binary input signal SEF BLOCK.
TSE1
SEF1-D t 0 121
& SEF1 TRIP
1
0.00 - 300.00s
[SE1-2F]
+ "Block"
&
ICD TSE1S2
&
SEF1_INST [SE1S2] t 0 122
&
[MSE1] SEF1-S2 TRIP
+
+ "ON" 0.00 - 300.00s
"DT"
67
SEF1
"IEC" 1
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
SEF1-I &
[SE1EN]
+
"ON" &
92
SEF1HS SEF1 HS
SEF1 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.3.2 Inverse Time or Definite Time SEF Protection SEF1
TSE2
SEF2-D t 0 123
& SEF2 TRIP
1
0.00 - 300.00s
[SE2-2F]
+ "Block"
&
ICD
&
SEF2_INST
[MSE2]
+
"DT"
68
SEF2
"IEC" 1
"IEEE"
"US"
"C"
SEF2-I &
[SE2EN]
+
"ON" &
SEF2 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.3.3 Inverse Time or Definite Time SEF Protection SEF2
 27 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
69 TSE3
SEF3 t 0 124
& SEF3 TRIP
1
0.00 - 300.00s
[SE3-2F]
+ "Block"
&
ICD
SEF3_INST &
[SE3EN]
+
"ON" &
SEF3 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.3.4 Definite Time SEF Protection SEF3
70 TSE4
SEF4 t 0 125
& SEF4 ALARM
1
0.00 - 300.00s
[SE4-2F]
+ "Block"
&
ICD
SEF4_INST &
[SE4EN]
+
"ON" &
SEF4 BLOCK 1
Figure 2.3.5 Definite Time SEF Scheme Logic
Setting
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the sensitive earth fault protection and
their setting ranges.
SE1 0.02 – 5.00 A 0.01 A 0.50 A SEF1 threshold setting
(0.004 – 1.000 A)(*1) (0.001 A) (0.100 A)
TSE1 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 SEF1 inverse time multiplier setting
0.00 – 300.00 s (*2) 0.01 s 1.00 s SEF1 definite time setting. Required if
[MSE1] =DT.
TSE1R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s SEF1 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MSE1] =IEC or if [SE1R] = DEF.
TSE1RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 SEF1 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [SE1R] = DEP.
TSE1S2 0.00 – 300.00 s (*2) 0.01 s 0.00 s SEF1 stage 2 definite time setting
(0.004 – 1.000 A)(*1) (0.001 A) (0.500 A)
TSE2 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 SEF2 inverse time multiplier setting
0.00 – 300.00 s (*2) 0.01 s 0.00 s SEF2 definite time setting.
TSE2R 0.0 – 300.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s SEF2 definite time delayed reset. Required if
[MSE2] =IEC or if [SE2R] = DEF.
 28 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

TSE2RM 0.010 – 1.500 0.001 1.000 SEF2 dependent time delayed reset time
multiplier. Required if [SE2R] = DEP.
(0.004 – 1.000 A)(*1) (0.001 A) (0.500 A)
TSE3 0.00 – 300.00 s (*2) 0.01 s 0.00 s SEF3 definite time setting.
(0.004 – 1.000 A)(*1) (0.001 A) (0.500 A)
TSE4 0.00 – 300.00 s (*2) 0.01 s 0.00 s SEF4 definite time setting.
[SE1EN] Off / On On SEF1 Enable
[MSE1] DT / IEC / IEEE / US / C DT SEF1 characteristic
[MSE1C] SEF1 inverse curve type.
MSE1C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MSE1] = IEC.
MSE1C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MSE1] = IEEE.
MSE1C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MSE1] = US.
[SE1R] DEF / DEP DEF SEF1 reset characteristic. Required if
[MSE1] = IEEE or US.
[SE1S2] Off / On Off SEF1 stage 2 timer enable
[SE1-2F] NA / Block NA SEF1 blocked by inrush current
[SE2EN] Off / On Off SEF2 Enable
[MSE2] DT / IEC / IEEE / US / C DT SEF2 characteristic
[MSE2C] SEF2 inverse curve type.
MSE2C-IEC NI / VI / EI / LTI NI Required if [MSE2] = IEC.
MSE2C-IEEE MI / VI / EI MI Required if [MSE2] = IEEE.
MSE2C-US CO2 / CO8 CO2 Required if [MSE2] = US.
[SE2R] DEF / DEP DEF SEF2 reset characteristic. Required if
[MSE2] = IEEE or US.
(*1) Current values shown in parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in the
case of a 5 A rating.
(*2) Time setting of TSE1 – TSE4 should be set in consideration of the SEF drop-off time 80-100ms.
SEF
SEF is set smaller than the available earth fault current and larger than the erroneous zero-phase
current. The erroneous zero-phase current exists under normal conditions due to the unbalanced
feeder configuration. The zero-phase current is normally fed from a core balance CT on the
feeder, but if it is derived from three phase CTs, the erroneous current may be caused also by the
CT error in phase faults.
The erroneous steady state zero-phase current can be acquired on the metering screen of the relay
front panel.
 29 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
High impedance REF protection

CT saturation under through fault conditions results in voltage appearing across the relay circuit.
The voltage setting of the relay circuit must be arranged such that it is greater than the maximum
voltage that can occur under through fault conditions. The worst case is considered whereby one
CT of the balancing group becomes completely saturated, while the others maintain linear
operation. The excitation impedance of the saturated CT is considered to approximate a
short-circuit.
Healthy CT Saturated CT
Transformer
Circuit
IF
Varistor ZZMM≈0
?0
RCT
VS
Stabilising GRD110
RS Resistor RL
Figure 2.3.4 Maximum Voltage under Through Fault Condition
The voltage across the relay circuit under these conditions is given by the equation:
VS = IF×(RCT + RL)
where:
VS = critical setting voltage (rms)
IF = maximum prospective secondary through fault current (rms)
RCT = CT secondary winding resistance
RL = Lead resistance (total resistance of the loop from the saturated CT to the relaying
point)
A series stabilising resistor is used to raise the voltage setting of the relay circuit to VS. No safety
margin is needed since the extreme assumption of unbalanced CT saturation does not occur in
practice. The series resistor value, Rs, is selected as follows:
RS = VS / IS
Is is the current setting (in secondary amps) applied to the GRD110 relay. However, the actual
fault setting of the scheme includes the total current flowing in all parallel paths. That is to say
that the actual primary current for operation, after being referred to the secondary circuit, is the
sum of the relay operating current, the current flowing in the varistor, and the excitation current
of all the parallel connected CTs at the setting voltage. In practice, the varistor current is
normally small enough that it can be neglected. Hence:
IS ≦ IP / N – 4Imag
where:
IS = setting applied to GRD110 relay (secondary amps)
IP = minimum primary current for operation (earth fault sensitivity)
N = CT ratio
Imag = CT magnetising (excitation) current at voltage VS
 30 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
More sensitive settings for Is allow for greater coverage of the transformer winding, but they also
require larger values of Rs to ensure stability, and the increased impedance of the differential
circuit can result in high voltages being developed during internal faults. The peak voltage, Vpk,
developed may be approximated by the equation:
Vpk = 2× 2  Vk  I F R S  Vk 
where:
Vk = CT knee point voltage
IF = maximum prospective secondary current for an internal fault
When a Metrosil is used for the varistor, it should be selected with the following characteristics:
V = CIβ
where:
V = instantaneous voltage
I = instantaneous current
 = constant, normally in the range 0.20 - 0.25
C = constant.
The C value defines the characteristics of the metrosil, and should be chosen according to the
following requirements:
1. The current through the metrosil at the relay voltage setting should be as low as possible,
preferably less than 30mA for a 1Amp CT and less than 100mA for a 5Amp CT.
2. The voltage at the maximum secondary current should be limited, preferably to 1500Vrms.
Restricted earth fault schemes should be applied with high accuracy CTs whose knee point
voltage Vk is chosen according to the equation:
Vk ≧ 2×VS
where VS is the differential stability voltage setting for the scheme.
 31 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.4 Phase Undercurrent Protection

The phase undercurrent protection is used to detect a decrease in current caused by a loss of load,
typically motor load.
The undercurrent element operates for current falling through the threshold level. But the
operation is blocked when the current falls below 4 % of CT secondary rating to discriminate the
loss of load from the feeder tripping by other protection.
Each phase has two independent undercurrent elements for tripping and alarming. The elements
are programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation.
The undercurrent element operates on per phase basis, although tripping and alarming is three-
phase only.
The tripping and alarming outputs can be blocked by scheme switches or a binary input signal.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.4.1 shows the scheme logic of the phase undercurrent protection.
Two undercurrent elements UC1 and UC2 output trip and alarm signals UC1 TRIP and UC2
ALARM through delayed pick-up timers TUC1 and TUC2.
Those protections can be disabled by the scheme switches [UC1EN] and [UC2EN] or binary
input signal UC BLOCK.
TUC1
71
A t 0 127
& UC1-A TRIP
72
UC1 B
73
C t 0 128
& UC1-B TRIP
t 0 129
[UC1EN] & UC1-C TRIP
+ 126
0.00 - 300.00s
"ON" 1 UC1 TRIP
TUC2
74
A t 0 131
& UC2-A ALARM
75
UC2 B
76
C t 0 132
& UC2-B ALARM
t 0 133
[UC2EN] & UC2-C ALARM
+ 0.00 - 300.00s 130
"ON" 1 UC2 ALARM
UC BLOCK 1
Figure 2.4.1 Undercurrent Protection Scheme Logic
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the undercurrent protection and their
setting ranges.
 32 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

UC1 0.5 – 10.0 A 0.1 A 2.0 A UC1 threshold setting
(0.10 – 2.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (0.40 A)
TUC1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s UC1 definite time setting
UC2 0.5 – 10.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A UC2 threshold setting
(0.10 – 2.00 A) (0.01 A) (0.20 A)
TUC2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s UC2 definite time setting
[UC1EN] Off / On Off UC1 Enable
[UC2EN] Off / On Off UC2 Enable
(*) Current values shown in parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in
 33 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.5 Thermal Overload Protection

The temperature of electrical plant rises according to an I2t function and the thermal overload
protection in GRD110 provides a good protection against damage caused by sustained
overloading. The protection simulates the changing thermal state in the plant using a thermal
model.
The thermal state of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
I2  t 
θ = 1  e    100% (1)
I AOL 
2 
where:
 = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
 = thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal state 0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, which is
the point at which no further temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be
disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The
relay gives a trip output when θ= 100%.
The thermal overload protection measures the largest of the three phase currents and operates
according to the characteristics defined in IEC60255-8. (Refer to Appendix A for the
implementation of the thermal model for IEC60255-8.)
Time to trip depends not only on the level of overload, but also on the level of load current prior
to the overload - that is, on whether the overload was applied from ‘cold’ or from ‘hot’.
Independent thresholds for trip and alarm are available.
The characteristic of thermal overload element is defined by equation (2) and equation (3) for
‘cold’ and ‘hot’. The cold curve is a special case for the hot curve where prior load current Ip is
zero, catering to the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
 I2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2  (2)
 I  I AOL 
 I2  I 2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2P  (3)
 I  I AOL 
where:
t = time to trip for constant overload current I (seconds)
I = overload current (largest phase current) (amps)
IAOL = allowable overload current (amps)
IP = previous load current (amps)
τ= thermal time constant (seconds)
Ln = natural logarithm
Figure 2.5.1 illustrates the IEC60255-8 curves for a range of time constant settings. The left-hand
chart shows the ‘cold’ condition where an overload has been switched onto a previously
 34 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
un-loaded system. The right-hand chart shows the ‘hot’ condition where an overload is switched
onto a system that has previously been loaded to 90% of its capacity.
Thermal Curves (Cold Curve - no Thermal Curves (Hot Curve -

prior load) 90% prior load)
1000 1000
100
100
Operate Time (minutes)

10
Operate Time (minutes)
10
1


1 100
0.1 50
50
1
20 020
10
0.1 10 0.01 5
5 2
2 1
0.001
0.01 1
1 10
1 10
Overload Current (Multiple of I AOL) Overload Current (Multiple of IAOL)
Figure 2.5.1 Thermal Curves
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.5.2 shows the scheme logic of the thermal overload protection.
The thermal overload element THM has independent thresholds for alarm and trip, and outputs
alarm signal THM ALARM and trip signal THM TRIP. The alarming threshold level is set as a
percentage of the tripping threshold.
The alarming and tripping can be disabled by the scheme switches [THMAEN] and [THMTEN]
respectively or binary input signal THM BLOCK.
 35 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
77
A & THM ALARM
THM
78
T & THM TRIP
[THMAEN]
+
"ON"
[THMEN]
+
"ON"
THM BLOCK 1
Figure 2.5.2 Thermal Overload Protection Scheme Logic
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the thermal overload protection and
THM 2.0 – 10.0 A 0.1 A 5.0 A Thermal overload setting.
(0.40 – 2.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (1.00 A) (THM = IAOL: allowable overload current)
THMIP 0.0 – 5.0 A 0.1 A 0.0 A Prior load setting.
(0.00 – 1.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (0.00 A)
TTHM 0.5 - 500.0 min 0.1 min 10.0 min Thermal time constant
THMA 50 – 99 % 1% 80 % Thermal alarm setting.
(Percentage of THM setting.)
[THMEN] Off / On Off Thermal OL enable
[THMAEN] Off / On Off Thermal alarm enable
(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current
values are in the case of a 5 A rating.
Note: THMIP sets a minimum level of previous load current to be used by the thermal element,
and is typically used when testing the element. For the majority of applications, THMIP
should be set to its default value of zero, in which case the previous load current, Ip, is
calculated internally by the thermal model, providing memory of conditions occurring
before an overload.
 36 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.6 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection

The negative sequence overcurrent protection (NSOP) is used to detect asymmetrical faults
(phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults) with high sensitivity in conjunction with phase
overcurrent protection and residual overcurrent protection. It also used to detect load unbalance
conditions.
Phase overcurrent protection is forced to be set to lower sensitivity when the load current is large
but NSOP sensitivity is not affected by magnitude of the load current, except in the case of
erroneous negative sequence current due to the unbalanced configuration of the distribution
lines.
For some earth faults, small zero sequence current is fed while the negative sequence current is
comparatively larger. This is probable when the fault occurs at the remote end with a small
reverse zero sequence impedance and most of the zero sequence current flows to the remote end.
In these cases, NSOP backs up the phase overcurrent and residual overcurrent protection. The
NSOP also protects the rotor of a rotating machine from over heating by detecting a load
unbalance. Unbalanced voltage supply to a rotating machine due to a phase loss can lead to
increases in the negative sequence current and in machine heating.
Two independent negative sequence overcurrent elements are provided for tripping and
alarming. The elements are programmable for instantaneous or definite time delayed operation.
The tripping and alarming outputs can be blocked by scheme switches or a binary input signal.
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.6.1 shows the scheme logic of the NSOP. Two negative sequence overcurrent elements
NPS1 and NPS2 with independent thresholds output trip signal NPS1 TRIP and alarm signal
NPS2 ALARM through delayed pick-up timers TNPS1 and TNPS2.
79 TNPS1
NPS1 t 0 136
& NPS1 TRIP
0.00 - 300.00s
[NPS1-2F]
+ "Block"
&
ICD
[NPS1EN]
+
"ON"
80 TNPS2
NPS2 137
& t 0 NPS2 ALARM
[NPS2-2F] 0.00 - 300.00s

+ "Block"
&
ICD
[NPS2EN]
+
"ON"
[APPL]
+
"3P"
NPS BLOCK 1
Figure 2.6.1 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection Scheme Logic
 37 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
The tripping and alarming can be disabled by the scheme switches [NPS1EN], [NPS2EN],
[APPL] or binary input signal NPS BLOCK.
The scheme switch [APPL] in which three-phase or two-phase overcurrent protection can be
selected. The NSOP is enabled when three-phase current is introduced and [APPL] is set to “3P”
in those models.
Note: Because the APPL setting is concerned in hardware configuration, it can be set only from the
LCD screen. (It cannot be changed or checked by RSM100.)
transformer energisation, and can block the NPS1 and NPS2 elements by the scheme switches
[NPS1-2F] and [NPS2-2F] respectively. See Section 2.9.
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the NSOP protection and their setting
ranges.
NPS1 0.5 -10.0 A 0.1 A 1.0 A NPS1 threshold setting for tripping.
(0.10 – 2.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (0.20 A)
NPS2 0.5 -10.0 A 0.1 A 2.0 A NPS2 threshold setting for alarming.
(0.10 – 2.00 A) (0.01 A) (0.40 A)
TNPS1 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s NPS1 definite time setting
TNPS2 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s NPS2 definite time setting
[NPS1EN] Off / On Off NPS1 Enable
[NPS1-2F] NA / Block NA NPS1 blocked by inrush current
[NPS2EN] Off / On Off NPS2 Enable
[NPS2-2F] NA / Block NA NPS2 blocked by inrush current
[APPL] 3P / 2P / 1P 3P Three-phase current input.
(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current
values are in the case of a 5 A rating.
Sensitive setting of NPS1 and NPS2 thresholds is restricted by the negative phase sequence
current normally present on the system. The negative phase sequence current is measured in the
relay continuously and displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel along with the
maximum value. It is recommended to check the display at the commissioning stage and to set
NPS1 and NPS2 to 130 to 150% of the maximum value displayed.
The delay time setting TNPS1 and TNPS2 is added to the inherent delay of the measuring
elements NPS1 and NPS2. The minimum operating time of the NPS elements is around 200ms.
 38 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.7 Broken Conductor Protection

Series faults or open circuit faults which do not accompany any earth faults or phase faults are
caused by broken conductors, breaker contact failure, operation of fuses, or false operation of
single-phase switchgear.
Figure 2.7.1 shows the sequence network connection diagram in the case of a single-phase series
fault assuming that the positive, negative and zero sequence impedance of the left and right side
system of the fault location is in the ratio of k1 to (1 – k1), k2 to (1 – k2) and k0 to (1 – k0).
E1A
Single-phase series fault
E1B
k1 1– k1
k 1Z1 I1F I1F (1-k1)Z1
E1A E1B
Positive phase sequence

k 2Z2 I2F I2F (1-k2)Z2
Negative phase sequence

k 0Z0 I0F I0F (1-k0)Z0
Zero phase sequence
I1F k 2Z2 (1-k2)Z2 I1F

k 1Z1 (1-k1)Z1
K0Z0 (1-k0)Z0
E1A E1B
I1F Z2
Z1
Z0
E1A E1B
Figure 2.7.1 Equivalent Circuit for a Single-phase Series Fault
 39 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Positive phase sequence current I1F, negative phase sequence current I2F and zero phase sequence
current I0F at fault location in an single-phase series fault are given by:
I1F + I2F + I0F =0 (1)

Z2FI2F  Z0FI0F = 0 (2)
E1A  E1B = Z1FI1F  Z2FI2F (3)
where,
E1A, E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive sequence impedance
Z2: negative sequence impedance
Z0: zero sequence impedance
From the equations (1), (2) and (3), the following equations are derived.
Z2 + Z0
I1F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A  E1B)
1 2 1 0 2 0
Z0
I2F = (E  E1B)
Z1Z2 + Z1Z0 + Z2Z0 1A
Z2
I0F = Z Z + Z Z + Z Z (E1A  E1B)
1 2 1 0 2 0
The magnitude of the fault current depends on the overall system impedance, difference in phase
angle and magnitude between the power source voltages behind both ends.
Broken conductor protection element BCD detects series faults by measuring the ratio of
negative to positive phase sequence currents (I2F / I1F). This ratio is given with negative and zero
sequence impedance of the system:
I2F |I2F| Z0
= =
I1F |I1F| Z2 + Z0
The ratio is higher than 0.5 in a system when the zero sequence impedance is larger than the
negative sequence impedance. It will approach 1.0 in a high-impedance earthed or a one-end
earthed system.
The characteristic of BCD element is shown in Figure 2.7.2 to obtain the stable operation.
I2
|I2|/|I1|  BCD
setting & BCD
|I1|  0.04In
|I2|  0.01In
0.01In
0 I1
0.04In In: rated current
Figure 2.7.2 BCD Element Characteristic
 40 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Scheme Logic
Figure 2.7.3 shows the scheme logic of the broken conductor protection. BCD element outputs
trip signals BCD TRIP through a delayed pick-up timer TBCD.
The tripping can be disabled by the scheme switch [BCDEN], [APPL] or binary input signal
BCD BLOCK. The broken conductor protection is enabled when three-phase current is
introduced and [APPL] is set to “3P”.
transformer energisation, and can block the BCD element by the scheme switch [BCD-2F]. See
Section 2.9.
81 TBCD
138
BCD t 0
& BCD TRIP
[NPS1-2F] 0.00 - 300.00s

+ "Block"
&
ICD
[BCDEN]
+
"ON"
[APPL]
+
"3P"
BCD BLOCK 1
Figure 2.7.3 Broken Conductor Protection Scheme Logic
Settings
The table below shows the setting elements necessary for the broken conductor protection and
BCD 0.10 – 1.00 0.01 0.20 I2 / I1
TBCD 0.00 – 300.00s 0.01s 0.00 s BCD definite time setting
[BCDEN] Off / On Off BCD Enable
[BCD-2F] NA / Block NA BCD blocked by inrush current
[APPL] 3P / 2P / 1P 3P Three-phase current input
Minimum setting of the BC threshold is restricted by the negative phase sequence current
normally present on the system. The ratio I2 / I1 of the system is measured in the relay
continuously and displayed on the metering screen of the relay front panel, along with the
maximum value of the last 15 minutes I21 max. It is recommended to check the display at the
commissioning stage. The BCD setting should be 130 to 150% of I2 / I1 displayed.
Note: It must be noted that I2 / I1 is displayed only when the positive phase sequence current
(or load current ) in the secondary circuit is larger than 2 % of the rated secondary circuit
current.
TBCD should be set to more than 1 cycle to prevent unwanted operation caused by a transient
operation such as CB closing.
 41 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.8 Breaker Failure Protection

When fault clearance fails due to a breaker failure, the breaker failure protection (BFP) clears the
fault by backtripping adjacent circuit breakers.
If the current continues to flow even after a trip command is output, the BFP judges it as a breaker
failure. The existence of the current is detected by an overcurrent element provided for each
phase. For high-speed operation of the BFP, a high-speed reset overcurrent element (less than
20ms) is used. The element resets when the current falls below 80% of the operating value.
In order to prevent the BFP from starting by accident during maintenance work and testing, and
thus tripping adjacent breakers, the BFP has the optional function of retripping the original
breaker. To make sure that the breaker has actually failed, a trip command is made to the original
breaker again before tripping the adjacent breakers to prevent unnecessary tripping of the
adjacent breakers following the erroneous start-up of the BFP. It is possible to choose not to use
retripping at all, or use retripping with trip command plus delayed pick-up timer, or retripping
with trip command plus overcurrent detection plus delayed pick-up timer.
An overcurrent element and delayed pick-up timer are provided for each phase which also
operate correctly during the breaker failure routine in the event of an evolving fault.
Scheme logic
The BFP is performed on per-phase basis. Figure 2.8.1 shows the scheme logic for the BFP. The
BFP is started by per-phase base trip signals EXT TRIP-A to -C or three-phase base trip signal
EXT TRIP3PH of the external line protection or an internal trip signal CBF INIT. These trip
signals must continuously exist as long as the fault is present.
The backtripping signal to the adjacent breakers CBF TRIP is output if the overcurrent element
CBF operates continuously for the setting time of the delayed pick-up timer TBTC after
initiation. Tripping of adjacent breakers can be blocked with the scheme switch [BTC].
There are two kinds of modes of the retrip signal to the original breaker CBF RETRIP, the mode
in which retrip is controlled by the overcurrent element CBF, and the direct trip mode in which
retrip is not controlled. The retrip mode together with the trip block can be selected with the
scheme switch [RTC]. In the scheme switch [RTC], “DIR” is the direct trip mode, and “OC” is
the trip mode controlled by the overcurrent element CBF.
Figure 2.8.2 shows a sequence diagram for the BFP when a retrip and backup trip are used. If the
circuit breaker trips normally, the CBF is reset before timer TRTC or TBTC is picked up and the
BFP is reset. As TRTC and TBTC start at the same time, the setting value of TBTC should
include that of TRTC.
If the CBF continues to operate, a retrip command is given to the original breaker after the setting
time of TRTC. Unless the breaker fails, the CBF is reset by retrip. TBTC does not time-out and
the BFP is reset. This sequence of events may happen if the BFP is initiated by mistake and
unnecessary tripping of the original breaker is unavoidable.
If the original breaker fails, retrip has no effect and the CBF continues operating and the TBTC
finally picks up. A trip command CBF TRIP is given to the adjacent breakers and the BFP is
completed.
 42 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
[BTC]
+ TBTC
82 "ON"
A t 0
& 140
83 1 CBF TRIP
CBF B
84 t 0
C &
t 0
&
0.00 - 300.00s
TRTC
t 0
& 139
1 1 CBF RETRIP
t 0
& 1
t 0
& 1
0.00 - 300.00s
EXT TRIP-APH
1 &
EXT TRIP-BPH 1 &
EXT TRIP-CPH
1 &
EXT TRIP3PH [RTC]

+
"OC"
CBF INIT
"DIR"
[APPL]
+
"3P"
Figure 2.8.1 Breaker Failure Protection Scheme Logic
Fault Start CBFP

Trip
Adjacent
breakers Closed Open
TRIP
Normal trip Retrip

Original
breakers Closed Open Open
Tcb Tcb
OCBF
Toc Toc
TRTC
TRTC
CBF
RETRIP
TBTC
TBTC
CBF
TRIP
Figure 2.8.2 Sequence Diagram
 43 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the breaker failure protection and their setting ranges are as
follows:
CBF 0.5 – 10.0 A 0.1 A 2.5 A Overcurrent setting
(0.10 - 2.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (0.50 A)
TRTC 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s Retrip time setting
TBTC 0.00 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 1.00 s Back trip time setting
[RTC] Off / DIR / OC Off Retrip control
[BTC] Off / On Off Back trip control
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of 1 A rating. Other
current values are in the case of 5 A rating.
The overcurrent element CBF checks that the circuit breaker has opened and that the current has
disappeared. Therefore, since it is allowed to respond to load current, it can be set to 10 to 200%
of the rated current.
The settings of TRTC and TBTC are determined by the opening time of the original circuit
breaker (Tcb in Figure 2.8.2) and the reset time of the overcurrent element (Toc in Figure 2.8.2).
The timer setting example when using retrip can be obtained as follows.
Setting of TRTC = Breaker opening time + CBF reset time + Margin
= 40ms + 10ms + 20ms
= 70ms
Setting of TBTC = TRTC + Output relay operating time + Breaker opening time +
CBF reset time + Margin
= 70ms + 10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 10ms
= 140ms
If retrip is not used, the setting of the TBTC can be the same as the setting of the TRTC.
The actual tripping time after BFP start will be added the time (approx. 15 to 20ms) consumed by
motion of binary input and output to above timer’s settings. (Response time of binary inputs: less
than 8ms, Operating time of binary outputs: less than 10ms)
 44 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.9 Countermeasures for Magnetising Inrush

GRD110-500s provides the following two schemes to prevent incorrect operation from a
magnetising inrush current during transformer energisation.
- Protection block by inrush current detector
- Cold load protection
2.9.1 Inrush Current Detector
Inrush current detector ICD detects second harmonic inrush current during transformer
energisation and blocks the following protections:
- OC1 to OC4
- EF1 to EF4
- SEF1 to SEF4
- NPS1 and NPS2
- BCD
The blocking can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switches [OC-2F], [EF-2F],
[SEF-2F], [NPS-2F] and [BCD-2F].
The ICD detects the ratio ICD-2f between second harmonic current I2f and fundamental current
I1f in each phase current, and operates if its ratio is larger than the setting value. Figure 2.9.1
shows the characteristic of the ICD element and Figure 2.9.2 shows the ICD block scheme. When
ICD operates, OC, EF, SEF, NPS and BCD elements are blocked independently. The scheme
logic of each element is shown in the previous sections.
I2f/I1f
|I2f|/|I1f|ICD-2f(%) & ICD
|I1f|ICDOC
ICD-2f(%)
0 ICDOC I1f
Figure 2.9.1 ICD Element Characteristic
261
A
262 1 ICD
ICD
B
263
C
Figure 2.9.2 ICD Block Scheme
Setting
The setting elements necessary for the ICD and their setting ranges are as follows:
 45 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

ICD-2f 10 – 50% 1% 15% Second harmonic detection
ICDOC 0.5 – 25.0 A 0.1 A 0.5 A ICD threshold setting
(0.10 - 5.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (0.10 A)
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values
are in the case of a 5 A rating.
2.9.2 Cold Load Protection
The cold load function modifies the overcurrent protection settings for a period after energising
the system. This feature is used to prevent unwanted protection operation when closing on to the
type of load which takes a high level of current for a period after energisation.
In normal operation, the load current on the distribution line is smaller than the sum of the rated
loads connected to the line. But it amounts to several times the maximum load current for a
moment when all of the loads are energised at once after a long interruption, and decreases to 1.5
times normal peak load after three or four seconds.
To protect those lines with overcurrent element, it is necessary to use settings to discriminate the
inrush current in cold load restoration and the fault current.
This function modifies the overcurrent protection settings for a period after closing on to the type
of load that takes a high level of load on energisation. This is achieved by a ‘Cold Load Settings
Group’, in which the user can use alternative settings of measuring elements in other setting
group. Normally the user will choose higher current settings and/or longer time delays and/or
disable elements altogether within this group. The ‘Cold Load Settings’ can be set in any of the
four setting groups provided for protection and the group is specified by the scheme switch
[CLSG] setting.
2.9.2.1 Scheme Logic

A state transition diagram and its scheme logic are shown in Figure 2.9.3 and Figure 2.9.4 for the
cold load protection. Note that the scheme requires the use of two binary inputs, one each for CB
OPEN and CB CLOSED.
Under normal conditions, where the circuit breaker has been closed for some time, the scheme is
in STATE 0, and the normal default settings group is applied to the overcurrent protection.
If the circuit breaker opens then the scheme moves to STATE 1 and runs the Cold Load Enable
timer TCLE. If the breaker closes again while the timer is running, then STATE 0 is re-entered.
Alternatively, if TCLE expires then the load is considered cold and the scheme moves to STATE
2, and stays there until the breaker closes, upon which it goes to STATE 3.
In STATE 2 and STATE 3, the ‘Cold Load Settings Group’ is applied.
In STATE 3 the Cold Load Reset timer TCLR runs. If the circuit breaker re-opens while the timer
is running then the scheme returns to STATE 2. Alternatively, if TCLR expires then it goes to
STATE 0, the load is considered warm and normal settings can again be applied.
Accelerated reset of the cold load protection is also possible. In STATE 3, the phase currents are
monitored by overcurrent element ICLDO and if all phase currents drop below the ICLDO
threshold for longer than the cold load drop off time (TCLDO) then the scheme automatically
reverts to STATE 0. The accelerated reset function can be enabled with the scheme switch
[CLDOEN] setting.
Cold load protection can be disabled by setting [CLSG] to “Off”.
 46 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
STATE 0
CB status: Closed
Settings: Normal
Monitor CB status
CB opens CB closes
within
T CLE time
STATE 1
CB status: Open
Settings: Normal
Run T CLE timer

I L<ICLDO for
Monitor CB status T CLR timer T CLDO time
expires
T CLE timer
expires
STATE 3
STATE 2 CB closes CB status: Closed
CB status: Open Settings: Cold Load
Settings: Cold Load
Run T CLR timer
Monitor CB status CB opens Monitor CB status
within Monitor load current I L
CLR time
Figure 2.9.3 State Transition Diagram for Cold Load Protection
CB CLOSE
CB OPEN
Change to
146 & STATE 1
STATE 0
TCLE
t 0 Change to
147 & 1 STATE 2
STATE 1
0 - 10000s
& Change to
1 STATE 0
148
STATE 2 Change to
&
STATE 3
149 &
STATE 3
TCLR
t 0
&
0 - 10000s TCLDO
t 0
85 &
A
86 1 1 0.00 - 100.00s
ICLDO B
87
C
[CLDOEN]
+
"ON"
Figure 2.9.4 Scheme Logic for Cold Load Protection
 47 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Settings
The setting elements necessary for the cold load protection and their setting ranges are as
follows:
ICLDO 0.5 – 10.0 A 0.1 A 2.5 A Cold load drop-off threshold setting
(0.10 - 2.00 A)(*) (0.01 A) (0.50 A)
TCLE 0-10000 s 1s 100 s Cold load enable timer
TCLR 0-10000 s 1s 100 s Cold load reset timer
TCLDO 0.00-100.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s Cold load drop-off timer
[CLSG] Off / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 Off Cold load setting group
[CLDOEN] Off / On Off Cold load drop-off enable
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values
are in the case of a 5 A rating.
These settings are required for all setting groups and the same settings must be entered for the
setting elements above.
 48 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.10 Trip Signal Output

As shown in Figure 2.10.1, all the trip signals are introduced into one of the seven user
configurable binary output circuits. One tripping output relay with a pair of normally open and
closed contacts is provided to trip the local circuit breaker. If the breaker failure protection is
applied, the back-trip signal CBF TRIP is introduced into another binary output circuit to trip
adjacent circuit breakers, as shown in Figure 2.10.2.
After the trip signal disappears by clearing the fault, the reset time of the tripping output relay can
be set with the scheme switch [Reset] to “instantaneous(Inst)”, “delayed(Dl)”, “dwell(Dw)” or
“latched(Latch)”. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can be set by
TBO. The setting is respective for each output relay.
When the relay is latched, it is reset with the RESET key on the relay front panel or a binary input
signal REMOTE RESET. This resetting resets all the output relays collectively.
When instantaneous reset of the tripping output relay is selected, it must be checked that the
tripping circuit is opened with a circuit breaker auxiliary contact prior to the tripping output relay
resetting, in order to prevent the tripping output relay from directly interrupting the circuit
breaker tripping coil current.
The tripping output relay has a pair of normally open and closed contact.
Settings
The setting elements necessary for the trip signal output and their setting ranges are as follows:
[RESET] Inst / Dl / Dw / Latch Del Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,
dwell, delayed or latched.
TBO 0.00 – 10.00s 0.01s 0.20s
 49 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
OC1 TRIP
OC2 TRIP
OC3 TRIP
EF1 TRIP
EF2 TRIP
1 CBF INIT
EF3 TRIP
SEF1-S1 TRIP
SEF1-S2 TRIP
SEF2 TRIP
SEF3 TRIP
UC1 TRIP
THM TRIP
NPS1 TRIP
BCD TRIP 141
1
CBF RETRIP
GENERAL TRIP
Binary output circuit
&
1 1 BO#m
[RESET]
&
TBO
"Inst"
0 t
&
"Dw"
+ 0.00 – 10.00s Tripping output relay
"Dl"
& S
"Latch" F/F
R
Reset button
+
1
REMOTE RESET
Figure 2.10.1 Tripping Output for Local Circuit Breaker
 50 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
CBF TRIP
&
1 1 BO#m
[RESET]
&
TBO
"Inst"
0 t
&
"Dw"
+ 0.00 – 10.00s Tripping output relay
"Dl"
& S
"Latch" F/F
R
Reset button
+
1
REMOTE RESET
Figure 2.10.2 Tripping Output for Adjacent Circuit Breakers
 51 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.11 Application of Protection Inhibits

All GRD110 protection elements can be blocked by a binary input signal. This feature is useful in
a number of applications.
2.11.1 Blocked Overcurrent Protection
Conventional time-graded definite time overcurrent protection can lead to excessive fault
clearance times being experienced for faults closest to the source. The implementation of a
blocked overcurrent scheme can eliminate the need for grading margins and thereby greatly
reduce fault clearance times. Such schemes are suited to radial feeder circuits, particularly where
substations are close together and pilot cables can be economically run between switchboards.
Figure 2.11.1 shows the operation of the scheme.
Instantaneous phase fault and earth fault pick-up signals OC1 HS, and EF1 HS of OC1 and EF1
elements are allocated to any of the binary output relays and used as a blocking signal. OC2 and
EF2 protections are set with a short delay time. (For pick-up signals, refer to Figure 2.1.5 and
2.1.6.)
For a fault at F as shown, each relay sends the blocking signal to its upstream neighbor. The
signal is input as a binary input signal OC2 BLOCK and EF2 BLOCK at the receiving end, and
blocks the OC2 and EF2 protection. Minimum protection delays of 50ms are recommended for
the OC2 and EF2 protection, to ensure that the blocking signal has time to arrive before
protection operation.
Inverse time graded operation with elements OC1 and EF1 are available with the scheme switch
[MOC1] setting, thus providing back-up protection in the event of a failure of the blocked
scheme.
Trip
GRD110 GRD110 GRD110
OC2 / EF2 OC2 / EF2 OC2 / EF2

OC1HS /
High EF1HS High
O
Speed Speed
Block Block
1
Figure 2.11.1 Blocked Overcurrent Protection
 52 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.11.2 Blocked Busbar Protection
GRD110 can be applied to provide a busbar zone scheme for a simple radial system where a
substation has only one source, as illustrated in Figure 2.11.2.
For a fault on an outgoing feeder F1, the feeder protection sends a hardwired blocking signal to
inhibit operation of the incomer, the signal OC1 HS and EF1 HS being generated by the
instantaneous phase fault, and earth fault pick-up outputs of OC1 and EF1 allocated to any of the
binary output relays. Meanwhile, the feeder is tripped by the OC1 and EF1 elements,
programmed with inverse time or definite time delays and set to grade with downstream
protections.
The incomer protection is programmed to trip via its instantaneous elements OC2 and EF2 set
with short definite time delay settings (minimum 50ms), thus providing rapid isolation for faults
in the busbar zone F2.
At the incomer, inverse time graded operation with elements OC1 and EF1 are available with the
scheme switch [MOC1] setting, thus providing back-up protection in the event of failure of the
blocked scheme.
GRD110 integrated circuit breaker failure protection can be used to provide additional back-trips
from the feeder protection to the incomer, and from the incomer to the HV side of the power
transformer, in the event of the first trip failing to clear the earth fault.
In the case of more complex systems where the substation has two incomers, or where power can
flow into the substation from the feeders, then directional protection must be applied (refer to
GRD140 directional overcurrent protection).
GRD110
Delayed Back-up Trip
OC1 / EF1
(inverse time)
High Speed Block to Incomer for Feeder Fault
OC2 / EF2
Fast Trip
F2
Feeder Trip Feeder Trip Feeder Trip
GRD110 GRD110 GRD110
OC2 / EF2 OC2 / EF2 OC2 / EF2

OC1 HS / OC1 HS / OC1 HS /
EF1 HS EF1 HS EF1 HS
F1
Figure 2.11.2 Blocked Busbar Protection
 53 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.12 CT Requirements
2.12.1 Phase Fault and Earth Fault Protection
Protection class current transformers are normally specified in the form shown below. The CT
transforms primary current within the specified accuracy limit, for primary current up to the
overcurrent factor, when connected to a secondary circuit of the given burden.
5 P 20 : 10VA
Accuracy Overcurrent Maximum Burden

Limit (%) Factor (at rated current)
Accuracy limit : Typically 5 or 10%. In applications where current grading is to be applied and
small grading steps are desirable, then a 5% CT can assist in achieving the necessary accuracy. In
less onerous applications, a limit of 10% may be acceptable.
Overcurrent factor : The multiple of the CT rating up to which the accuracy limit is claimed,
typically 10 or 20 times. A value of 20 should be specified where maximum fault current is high
and accurate inverse time grading is required. In applications where fault current is relatively
low, or where inverse time grading is not used, then an overcurrent factor of 10 may be adequate.
Maximum burden : The total burden calculated at rated secondary current of all equipment
connected to the CT secondary, including relay input burden, lead burden, and taking the CT’s
own secondary resistance into account. GRD110 has an extremely low AC current burden,
typically less than 0.1VA for a 1A phase input, allowing relatively low burden CTs to be applied.
Relay burden does not vary with settings.
If a burden lower than the maximum specified is connected, then the practical overcurrent factor
may be scaled accordingly. For the example given above, at a rated current of 1A, the maximum
value of CT secondary resistance plus secondary circuit resistance (RCT + R2) should be 10. If
a lower value of, say, (RCT + R2) = 5 is applied, then the practical overcurrent factor may be
increased by a factor of two, that is, to 40A.
In summary, the example given of a 5P20 CT of suitable rated burden will meet most applications
of high fault current and tight grading margins. Many less severe applications may be served by
5P10 or 10P10 transformers.
2.12.2 Minimum Knee Point Voltage
An alternative method of specifying a CT is to calculate the minimum knee point voltage,

according to the secondary current which will flow during fault conditions:
Vk ≥ If (RCT + R2)
where:
Vk = knee point voltage
If = maximum secondary fault current
RCT = resistance of CT secondary winding
R2 = secondary circuit resistance, including lead resistance.
When using this method, it should be noted that it is often not necessary to transform the
 54 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
maximum fault current accurately. The knee point should be chosen with consideration of the
settings to be applied and the likely effect of any saturation on protection performance. Further,
care should be taken when determining R2, as this is dependent on the method used to connect
the CTs (E.g. residual connection, core balanced CT connection, etc).
2.12.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
A core balance CT should be applied, with a minimum knee point calculated as described above.
2.12.4 Restricted Earth Fault Protection
High accuracy CTs should be selected with a knee point voltage Vk chosen according to the
equation:
Vk ≥ 2× Vs
where Vs is the differential stability voltage setting for the scheme.
 55 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
2.13 Autoreclose
The GRD110-500 series provides a multi-shot (five shots) autoreclosing scheme applied for
one-circuit breaker:
 Three phase autoreclosing scheme for all shots
 Autoreclosing counter
The autoreclosing (ARC) can be initialized by OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4, SEF1-S1 to SEF4 trip
signals or external trip signals via binary inputs, as determined by scheme switches [-INIT].
Trip signals are selected to be used or not used for ARC, by setting [-INIT] to “On” or “NA”
respectively. If a trip signal is used to block ARC, then [-INIT] is set to “BLK”. ARC can
also be blocked by binary input signal ARC BLOCK.
Three-phase autoreclosing is provided for all shots, regardless of whether the fault is
single-phase or multi-phase. Autoreclosing can be programmed to provide any number of shots,
from one to five. In each case, if the first shot fails, then all subsequent shots apply three-phase
tripping and reclosing.
To disable autoreclosing, scheme switch [ARCEN] is set to "Off".
2.13.1 Scheme Logic
Figure 2.13.1 shows the simplified scheme logic for the autoreclose. Autoreclose becomes ready
when the circuit breaker is closed and ready for autoreclose (CB READY=1), the on-delay timer
TRDY is picked up, and the [ARCEN] is set to "ON". TRDY is used to determine the reclaim
time.
If the autoreclose is ready, then reclosing is activated by ARC INIT. ARC INT is programmed
from tripping commands of the various protections by scheme switches [-INIT]. Further,
and the autoreclosing command signal ARC INIT and the external tripping command signals
EXT TRIP-APH, EXT TRIP-BPH, EXT TRIP-CPH and EXT TRIP-3PH can also activate the
autoreclose via binary inputs.
External reclose condition such as voltage and synchronism check, etc., can be offered by a
binary input signal ARCREQ.
Once autoreclose is activated, it is maintained by a flip-flop circuit until one reclosing cycle is
completed.
Autoreclose success (ARC SUCCESS) or fail (ARC FAIL) can be displayed as an event record
message by the event record setting.
Multi-shot autoreclose
Regardless of the tripping mode, three-phase reclose is performed. If the [ARCEN] is set to "On",
the dead time counter TD1 for three-phase reclosing is started. After the dead time has elapsed,
reclosing command ARC-SHOT is initiated.
Multi-shot autoreclose can be executed up to four times after the first-shot autoreclose fails. The
multi-shot mode, one to five shots, is set with the scheme switch [ARC-NUM].
During multi-shot reclosing, the dead time counter TD2 for the second shot is activated if the first
shot autoreclose is performed, but tripping occurs again. Second shot autoreclose is performed
after the period of time set on TD2 has elapsed. At this time, outputs of the step counter are: SP1
= 1, SP2 = 0, SP3 = 0, SP4 = 0 and SP5 = 0.
Autoreclose is completed at this step if the two shots mode is selected for the multi-shot mode. In
 56 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
this case, tripping following a "reclose-onto-a-fault" becomes the final trip (ARC FT = 1).
If three shot mode is selected for the multi-shot mode, autoreclose is further retried after the
above tripping occurs. At this time, the T1S3 is started. The third shot autoreclose is performed
after the period of time set on the TD3 has elapsed. At this time, outputs of the step counter are:
SP1 = 0, SP2 = 1, SP3 = 0, SP4 = 0 and SP5 = 0.
The three shot mode of autoreclose is then completed, and tripping following a
"reclose-onto-a-fault" becomes the final trip (ARC FT = 1).
When four or five shot autoreclose is selected, autoreclose is further retried once again for
tripping that occurs after "reclose-onto-a-fault". This functions in the same manner as the three
shot autoreclose.
If a fault occurs under the following conditions, the final trip is performed and autoreclose is
blocked.
 Reclosing block signal is applied.
 During the reclaim time
 Reclose condition is not completed when the scheme switch [ARC REQ] is "On".
TRDY TD1 STEP COUNTER
t 0 S S t 0 SP1
ARC READY & & Coordination CLK SP2
F/F & F/F & 1
0.0-600.0s R SP1 0.01-300.00s SP3
[ARCEN] R
ARC-SHOT1 SP4
+ ARC-SHOT1 SP5
"ON"
ARC REQ ARC_R ARC-SHOT2
ARC INIT (Trip command) TP1 1 TW 223
1 "ON" & TR1 ARC-SHOT3 1
EXT TRIP [ARCREQ] t 0 ARC-SHOT
+ "OFF" ARC-FT ARC-SHOT4 1
0.01-10.00s
0.01-310.00s
Autoreclose initiation ARC-SHOT5
TD2
& S t 0
F/F &
SP2 R 0.01-300.00s
TR2 ARC_R
ARC-SHOT2 t 0
ARC-FT
0.01-310.00s
TD3
& S t 0
F/F &
SP3 R 0.01-300.00s
TR3 ARC_R
ARC-SHOT3 t 0
ARC-FT
1 0.01-310.00s
TD4
ARC-SUCCESS t 0
& S
ARC FAIL F/F &
SP4 R 0.01-300.00s
ARC-FT
TR4 ARC_R
ARC-SHOT4 t 0
Reset TRSET ARC-FT
t 0 0.01-310.00s
CB CLOSE & 1 TD5
0.01-300.00s
& S t 0
TARCP F/F &
t 0 & 0.01-300.00s
SP5 R
TR5 ARC_R
0.1-300.0s
ARC-SHOT5 t 0
ARC-FT
TRCOV 0.01-310.00s
0 t
1
&
0.1-600.0s
MANUAL CLOSE
Figure 2.13.1 Autoreclose Scheme Logic
Autoreclose initiation
Programmable binary input ARC-READY(CB& 63condition) is alive and Reclaim time TRDY
has elapsed and Scheme switch [ARCEN] is set to "On," then autoreclose initiation is ready. The
reclaim time is selected by setting [TRDY] to “0.0-600.0s”.
ARC INIT(Autoreclose initiation) can consist of the following trips. Whether autoreclose
initiation is active or not is selected by setting [-INIT].
 57 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
- OC1 to OC4 trip

- EF1 to EF4 trip
- SEF1 to SEF4 trip
Setting [-INIT] = NA / On / Block
NA: Autoreclose initiation is not active.
On : Autoreclose initiation is active.
Block: Autoreclose is blocked.
EXT TRIP(External autoreclose initiation) is autoreclose initiation by programmable binary
inputs. Whether autoreclose initiation is active or not is selected by setting [EXT-INIT].
Setting [EXT-INIT] = NA / On / Block
TRDY
ARC READY t 0 ARC initiation
& &
[ARCEN] 0.0-600.0s
+
"ON"
ARC INIT (Trip command)
1
EXT TRIP
Figure 2.13.2 Autoreclose Initiation
Autoreclose shot output (ARC-SHOT)

The maximum autoreclosing shot is selected by setting [ARC-NUM].
Setting [ARC-NUM] = S1/S2/S3/S4/S5
The command output condition is passage of TD time or BI condition [ARCREQ] and it is
selected by setting [ARCREQ].
The passage of TD time(Dead timer) is selected on each shot number by setting [TD] to
“0.01-300.00s.”
The command output pulse(One shot) time is selected by setting [TW] to “0.01-10.00s.”
TD1 ARC-SHOT1
& S t 0
&
F/F 1
R 0.01-300.00s TW
SP1
1 ARC-SHOT
ARC-SHOT1
0.01-10.00s
TD2 ARC-SHOT2
& S t 0
&
F/F
SP2 R 0.01-300.00s
ARC-SHOT2
TD3 ARC-SHOT3
& S t 0
&
F/F
SP3 R 0.01-300.00s
ARC-SHOT3
TD4 ARC-SHOT4
& S t 0
&
F/F
SP4 R 0.01-300.00s
ARC-SHOT4
TD5 ARC-SHOT5
& S 0
&
F/F
SP5 R 0.01-300.00s
ARC-SHOT5 ARC-R
Figure 2.13.3 Autoreclosing requirement
 58 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Autoreclose success judgement (ARC-SUCCESS)

If the re-trip is not done within a period of time after output of autoreclosing shot, it is judged
Autoreclose success(ARC-SUCCESS).
The period of time is selected by setting [TSUC] to “0.1-600.0s”.
ARC-SUCCESS
Figure 2.13.4 Autoreclose success judgement
Autoreclose failure judgement (ARC-FAIL)

If the CB contact or BI condition [CBOPN] is not closed within a period of time after output of
autoreclosing shot, it is judged Autoreclose failure(ARC-FAIL).
The period of time is selected by setting [TFAIL] to “0.1-600.0s”.
Whether the function is active or not is selected by setting [ARCFAIL] to “Off” or “On”.
ARC-FAIL
Figure 2.13.5 Autoreclose failure judgement
Final trip judgement (ARC-FT)

The following cases are judged ARC-FT(Final Trip) and autoreclose is reset without autoreclose
output.
 Autoreclose initiation when autoreclose initiation is not ready
 Autoreclose initiation after final shot output of setting multi-shot mode
 Autorecloce block signal
- Autoreclose block signal by programmable BI
- OC1 to OC4, EF1 to EF4 and SEF1 to SEF 4 trip of setting autoreclose block are active.
Setting [-INIT] = NA / On / Block
NA: Autoreclose initiation is not active.
On : Autoreclose initiation is active.
Block: Autoreclose is blocked.
 BI condition [ARCREQ] is not completed when [ARCREQ] is set to “On”. FT is
performed after Timer [TR*].
ARC-FT
Figure 2.13.6 Final trip judgement
Reset
If programmable binary input CB CLOSE(CB close condition) is alive and the CB is closed
within a period of time after autoreclose initiation, autoreclose is forcibly reset.
The period of time is selected by setting [TRSET] to “0.01-300.00s”.
It is assumed that the CB is not open(=CBF), in spite of the trip output(=autoreclose initiation).
 59 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
TRSET
t 0
&
CB CLOSE 0.01-300.00s
Figure 2.13.7 Reset
Manual close function (MANUAL CLOSE)

MANUAL CLOSE is programmable BI signal and is able to close CB by external signal input.
Autoreclose initiation is not active within a period of time after manual close command output.
The period of time is selected by setting [TARCP] to “0.1-600.0s”.
In the case of final trip judgement, manual close command output is blocked within a period of
time. The period of time is selected by setting [TRCOV] to “0.1-600.0s”.
ARC-FT
TARCP
t 0
0.1-600.0s
TRCOV
0 t 1 &
0.1-600.0s
MANUAL CLOSE
Figure 2.13.8 Manual input function
2.13.2 Sequence Coordination
Co-ordination is maintained between the autoreclose sequences of adjacent relays on a feeder.

This means that a relay will register the flow of fault current and increment through its
autoreclose sequence even if another relay actually carries out the tripping and reclosing
operations. This function is initiated by the operation of OC, EF or SEF element, and can be
disabled by the scheme switch [COORD-OC], [COORD-EF] or [COORD-SE].
The reclose shot number at the local terminal A is coordinated with that at the adjacent terminal
B as shown in Figure 2.13.2.
A B Fault
GRD110 GRD110
Figure 2.13.9 Sequence Coordination
2.13.3 Setting
The setting elements necessary for the autoreclose and their setting ranges are shown in the table
below.
TRDY 0.0 – 600.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s Reclaim time
TD1 0.01 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 10.00 s 1st shot dead time for Stage 1
TR1 0.01 – 310.00 s 0.01 s 310.00 s 1st shot reset time for Stage 1
TD2 0.01 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 10.00 s 2nd shot dead time for Stage 1
 60 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

TR2 0.01 – 310.00 s 0.01 s 310.00 s 2nd shot reset time for Stage 1
TD3 0.01 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 10.00 s 3rd shot dead time for Stage 1
TR3 0.01 – 310.00 s 0.01 s 310.00 s 3rd shot reset time for Stage 1
TD4 0.01 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 10.00 s 4th shot dead time for Stage 1
TR4 0.01 – 310.00 s 0.01 s 310.00 s 4th shot reset time for Stage 1
TD5 0.01 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 10.00 s 5th shot dead time for Stage 1
TR5 0.01 – 310.00 s 0.01 s 310.00 s 5th shot reset time for Stage 1
TW 0.01 – 10.00 s 0.01 s 2.00 s Output pulse time
TSUC 0.0 – 600.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Autoreclose succeed judgement time
TFAIL 0.0 – 600.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s Autoreclose confirmatory time after autoreclose
command
TRCOV 0.1 – 600.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s Autoreclose recovery time after final trip
TARCP 0.1 – 600.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s Autoreclose pause time after manually closing
TRSET 0.01 – 300.00 s 0.01 s 3.00 s Autoreclose reset time
[ARCEN] Off/On On Autoreclose enable
[ARC-NUM] S1/S2/S3/S4/S5 S1 Autoreclosing shot number
[ARCREQ] Off/On Off Autoreclosing requirement
[ARCFAIL] Off/On Off Autoreclosing confirmation
[COORD-OC] Off/On Off OC relay for Co-ordination
[COORD-EF] Off/On Off EF relay for Co-ordination
[COORD-SE] Off/On Off SE relay for Co-ordination
[OC1-INIT] NA/On/Block NA Autoreclose initiation by OC1
[EF1-INIT] NA/On/Block NA Autoreclose initiation by EF1
[SE1-INIT] NA/On/Block NA Autoreclose initiation by SE1
[EXT-INIT] NA/On/Block NA Autoreclose initiation by external trip command
OC 0.2  250.0 A 0.1 A 5.0 A OC for co-ordination
(0.04  50.00 A) (*) (0.01 A) (1.00 A)
EF 0.1  250.0 A 0.1 A 1.5 A EF for co-ordination
(0.02  50.00 A) (0.01 A) (0.30 A)
SEF 0.02  5.00 A 0.01 A 0.50 A SEF for co-ordination
(0.004  1.000 A) (0.001 A) (0.100 A)
(*) Current values shown in the parenthesis are in the case of a 1 A rating. Other current values are in
To determine the dead time, it is essential to find an optimal value while taking factors,
de-ionization time and power system stability, into consideration which normally contradict each
other.
Normally, a longer de-ionization time is required as for a higher line voltage or larger fault
current. For three-phase autoreclose, the dead time is generally 15 to 30 cycles.
 61 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
3. Technical Description
3.1 Hardware Description
3.1.1 Outline of Hardware Modules
The case outline of GRD110 is shown in Appendix F.

The hardware structure of GRD110 is shown in Figure 3.1.1.
The GRD110 relay unit consists of the following hardware modules. These modules are fixed in
a frame and cannot be taken off individually. The human machine interface module is provided
with the front panel.
 Power module (POWD)
 Signal processing module (SPMD)
 Human machine interface module (HMI)
The hardware block diagram of GRD110 is shown in Figure 3.1.2.
SPMD
POWD
HMI
IN SERVICE VIEW
TRIP
ALARM
RESET
CAN
CEL ENTER
Handle for relay END
withdrawal
Figure 3.1.1 Hardware Structure without Case
 62 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
POWD SPMD
DC
supply DC/DC
Converter
Binary Photo-coupler
input V 8
Auxiliary relay Binary output

AC input Analogue Multi- A/D
I CT  4 MPU 8 (Trip
(Max) filter plexer converter command etc.)
Relay
RS485 setting and
RAM ROM Transceiver monitoring
 1 or 2 system
or
IEC60870-5
-103
Human machine
Interface (HMI)
Liquid crystal display

16 characters  2 lines
LEDs Operation keys
Local
personal RS232C
computer I/F
Figure 3.1.2 Hardware Block Diagram
POWD Module
The POWD module insulates between the internal and external circuits through an auxiliary
transformer and transforms the magnitude of AC input signals to suit the electronic circuits. The
AC input signals may be one to three phase currents and a residual current depending on the relay
model.
This module incorporates max. 4 auxiliary CTs, DC/DC converter and photo-coupler circuits for
binary input signals.
The available input voltage ratings of the DC/DC converter are, 48V, 110V/125V or 220/250V.
The normal range of input voltage is 20% to 20%.
SPMD Module
The SPMD module consists of analogue filter, multiplexer, analogue to digital (A/D) converter,
main processing unit (MPU), random access memory (RAM) and read only memory (ROM) and
executes all kinds of processing such as protection, measurement, recording and display.
The analogue filter performs low-pass filtering for the corresponding current signals.
The A/D converter has a resolution of 12 bits and samples input signals at sampling frequencies
of 2400 Hz (at 50 Hz) and 2880 Hz (at 60 Hz).
 63 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
The MPU implements more than 240 MIPS and uses a RISC (Reduced Instruction Set Computer)
type 32-bit microprocessors.
The SPMD module also incorporates 8 auxiliary relays (BO1-BO7 and FAIL) for binary output
signals and an RS485 transceiver.
BO1 to BO6 are user configurable output signals and have one normally open and one normally
closed contact. BO7 is also a user-configurable output signal and has one normally open contact.
The auxiliary relay FAIL has one normally open and one normally closed contacts, and operates
when a relay failure or abnormality in the DC circuit is detected.
The RS485 transceiver is used for the link with the relay setting and monitoring (RSM) system or
IEC60870-5-103 communication. The external signal is isolated from the relay’s internal
circuits.
Human Machine Interface (HMI) Module

The operator can access the GRD110 via the human machine interface (HMI) module. As shown
in Figure 3.1.3, the HMI panel has a liquid crystal display (LCD), light emitting diodes (LED),
view and reset keys, operation keys and an RS232C connector on the front panel.
The LCD consists of 16 columns by 2 rows with a back-light and displays recording, status and
setting data.
There are a total of 6 LED indicators and their signal labels and LED colors are defined as
follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flickered when the relay is in “Test” menu.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Red Lit when a failure is detected.
(LED1) Yellow
(LED2) Yellow
(LED3) Yellow
LED1, LED2 and LED3 are user-configurable. Each is driven via a logic gate which can be
programmed for OR gate or AND gate operation. Further, each LED has a programmable reset
characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. A configurable LED
can be programmed to indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual
statuses of which can be viewed on the LCD screen as “Virtual LEDs.”
The TRIP LED and an operated LED if latching operation is selected, must be reset by user,
either by pressing the RESET key, by energising a binary input which has been programmed for
‘Remote Reset’ operation, or by a communications command. Other LEDs operate as long as a
signal is present. The RESET key is ineffective for these LEDs. Further, the TRIP LED is
controlled with the scheme switch [AOLED] whether it is lit or not by an output of alarm element
such as OC4 ALARM, EF4 ALARM, etc..
The VIEW key starts the LCD indication and switches between windows. The RESET key
clears the LCD indication and turns off the LCD back-light.
The operation keys are used to display the record, status and setting data on the LCD, input the
settings or change the settings.
 64 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
The RS232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection. This
connector is used for connection with a local personal computer.
Screw for cover
Liquid crystal
display
IN SERVICE VIEW
TRIP
Light emitting ALARM
diodes (LED)
RESET
Operation keys
CAN
CEL ENTER
RS232C connector END
To a local PC
Screw for handle Screw for cover
Figure 3.1.3 Front Panel
 65 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
3.2 Input and Output Signals

3.2.1 AC Input Signals
Table 3.2.1 shows the AC input signals necessary for the GRD110 model and their respective
input terminal numbers. Model 500 and 520 depend on their scheme switch [APPL] setting.
Table 3.2.1 AC Input Signals

: Scheme switch [APPL] setting
Model
Term. No.
500 500 500 520 520 520
of TB1
3P 2P 1P 3P 2P 1P
A phase A phase --- A phase A phase ---

1-2 current current current current
B phase C phase --- B phase C phase ---

3-4 current current current current
C phase Residual Residual C phase Residual Residual

5-6 current current (E) current (E) current current (E) current (E)
Residual Zero Zero Zero

7-8 current (E) --- --- sequence sequence sequence
current (SE) current (SE) current (SE)
3.2.2 Binary Input Signals
The GRD110 provides eight programmable binary input circuits. Each binary input circuit is
programmable, and provided with the function of Logic level inversion and Function selection.
Logic level inversion

The binary input circuit of the GRD110 is provided with a logic level inversion function and a
pick-up and drop-off delay timer function as shown in Figure 3.2.1. Each input circuit has a
binary switch BISNS which can be used to select either normal or inverted operation. This allows
the inputs to be driven either by normally open or normally closed contacts. Where the driving
contact meets the contact conditions then the BISNS can be set to “Norm” (normal). If not, then
“Inv” (inverted) should be selected. The pick-up and drop-off delay times can be set 0.0 to
300.00s respectively.
Logic level inversion function, and pick-up and drop-off delay timer settings are as follow:
Element Contents Range Step Default
BI1SNS - BI8SNS Binary switch Norm/ Inv Norm
BI1PUD - BI8PUD Delayed pick-up timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00
BI1DOD - BI8DOD Delayed drop-off timer 0.00 - 300.00s 0.01s 0.00
The operating voltage of binary input signal is typical 74V DC at 110V/125V DC rating and
138V DC at 220/250V DC. The minimum operating voltage is 70V DC at 110/125V DC rating
and 125V DC at 220/250V DC.
 66 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
GRD110
(+) () BI1PUD BI1DOD [BI1SNS]
BI1 t 0 0 t
BI1 command
BI1
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
BI2PUD BI2DOD [BI2SNS]
BI2 t 0 0 t
BI2 command
BI2
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
BI8PUD BI8DOD [BI8SNS]

BI8 t 0 0 t
BI8 BI8 command
"Norm"
1
"Inv"
0V
3.2.1 Logic Level Inversion
Function selection
The input signals BI1 COMMAND to BI8 COMMAND are used for the functions listed in Table
3.2.2. Each input signal can be allocated for one or some of those functions by setting. For the
setting, refer to Section 4.2.6.8.
The Table also shows the signal name corresponding to each function used in the scheme logic
and LCD indication and driving contact condition required for each function.
[OC1BLK]
BI1 COMMAND OC1 BLOCK
"ON"
[OC2BLK]
OC2 BLOCK
"ON"
[OC3BLK]
OC3 BLOCK
"ON"
[Alarm4]
Alarm 4
"ON"
Figure 3.2.2 Function Scheme Logic
The logic of BI2 COMMAND to BI8 COMMAND are the same as that of BI1 COMMAND as
shown in Figure 3.2.2.
 67 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Table 3.2.2 Function of Binary Input Signals
Functions Signal Names (*1) Driving Contact Condition

OC1 protection block OC1 BLOCK / OC1BLK Closed to block
EF1 protection block EF1 BLOCK / EF1BLK Closed to block
SEF1 protection block SEF1 BLOCK / SEF1BLK Closed to block
Undercurrent protection block UC BLOCK / UCBLK Closed to block
Thermal overload protection block THM BLOCK / THMBLK Closed to block
Negative sequence OC Broken conductor NPS BLOCK / NPSBLK Closed to block
protection block
Broken conductor protection BCD BLOCK / BCDBLK Closed to block
Trip circuit supervision TC FAIL / TCFALM Trip supply
State transition for cold load protection, trip CB CONT OPN / CBOPN CB normally open contact
supervision and CB monitoring
CB monitoring CB CONT CLS / CBCLS CB normally closed contact.
Breaker failure protection initiate EXT TRIP3PH / EXT3PH External trip - 3 phase.
Breaker failure protection initiate EXT TRIP-APH / EXTAPH External trip - A phase.
Breaker failure protection initiate EXT TRIP-BPH / EXTBPH External trip - B phase
Breaker failure protection initiate EXT TRIP-CPH / EXTCPH External trip - C phase
Indication remote reset REMOTE RESET / RMTRST Closed to reset TRIP LED indication
and latch of binary output relays
Disturbance record store STORE RECORD / STORCD Closed to store the record
Alarm 1 Alarm 1 / Alarm1 Closed to display Alarm 1 text.
(*1) : Signal names are those used in the scheme logic / LCD indication.
The binary input signals can be programmed to switch between four settings groups.
Element Contents Range Step Default
BI1SGS – BI8SGS Setting group selection OFF / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 OFF
 68 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Four alarm messages can be set. The user can define a text message within 16 characters for each
alarm. The messages are valid for any of the input signals BI1 to BI8 by setting. Then when
inputs associated with that alarm are raised, the defined text is displayed on the LCD.
3.2.3 Binary Output Signals
The number of binary output signals and their output terminals are as shown in Appendix G. All
outputs, except the relay failure signal, can be configured.
The signals shown in the signal list in Appendix B can be assigned to the output relays BO1 to
BO7 individually or in arbitrary combinations. Signals can be combined using either an AND
circuit or OR circuit with 4 gates each as shown in Figure 3.2.3. The output circuit can be
configured according to the setting menu. Appendix H shows the factory default settings.
Further, each BO has a programmable reset characteristic, settable for instantaneous drop-off
“Inst”, for delayed drop-off “Dl”, for dwell operation “Dw” or for latching operation “Latch” by
the scheme switch [RESET]. The time of the delayed drop-off “Dl” or dwell operation “Dw” can
be set by TBO. When “Dw” selected, the BO outputs for the TBO set time if the input signal does
not continue on the TBO set time. If the input signal continues more, the BO output is continuous
for the input signal time.
The relay failure contact closes when a relay defect or abnormality in the DC power supply
circuit is detected.
Signal List
& 4 GATES Auxiliary relay

Appendix A &
or 1
1
1
4 GATES
&
TBO
0 t
"Inst" &
[RESET] "Dw" 0.00 – 10.00s
+ "Dl"
& S
F/F
"Latch"
R
Reset button
+ 1
REMOTE RESET
Figure 3.2.3 Configurable Output
Settings
The setting elements necessary for binary output relays and their setting ranges are as follows:
[RESET] Inst / Dl / Dw /Latch See Appendix C Output relay reset time. Instantaneous,
delayed, dwell or latched.
TBO 0.00 – 10.00s 0.01s See Appendix C
 69 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
3.3 Automatic Supervision

3.3.1 Basic Concept of Supervision
Though the protection system is in a non-operating state under normal conditions, it waits for a
power system fault to occur at any time, and must operate for the fault without fail. Therefore, the
automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the protection system during normal
operation, plays an important role. The GRD110 implements an automatic supervision function,
based on the following concepts:
 The supervising function should not affect the protection performance.
 Perform supervision with no omissions wherever possible.
 When a failure occurs, the user should be able to easily identify the location of the failure.
3.3.2 Relay Monitoring

The relay is supervised by the following functions.
AC input imbalance monitoring

This monitoring is provided for models 500 and 520 and is available only for [APPL] = “3P”
setting.
The AC current input is monitored to check that the following equation is satisfied and the health
of the AC input circuit is verified.
 CT circuit current monitoring
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|)  4  Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|)  k0
where,
Max(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Maximum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
Min(|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|) = Minimum amplitude among Ia, Ib and Ic
k0 = 20% of rated current
The CT circuit current monitoring allows high sensitivity detection of failures that have occurred
in the AC input circuit. If the imbalance detected, the relay issues an alarm shown in Table 3.3.1.
A/D accuracy checking

An analog reference voltage is input to a prescribed channel in the analog-to-digital (A/D)
converter, and it is checked that the data after A/D conversion is within a prescribed range, and
that the A/D conversion characteristics are correct.
Memory monitoring
Memory is monitored as follows, depending on the type of memory, and checks are done to
verify that memory circuits are healthy:
 Random access memory monitoring:
Writes/reads prescribed data and checks the storage function.
 Program memory monitoring: Checks the checksum value of the written data.
 Setting value monitoring: Checks discrepancies between the setting values stored in
duplicate.
 70 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Watchdog Timer
A hardware timer that is cleared periodically by the software is provided, which checks that the
software is running normally.
DC Supply Monitoring
The secondary voltage level of the built-in DC/DC converter is monitored, and is checked to see
that the DC voltage is within a prescribed range.
The alarms are issued when the failure continues for a predetermined time. The times for each
monitoring item are as follows;
 A/D accuracy checking, memory monitoring, Watch Dog Timer, DC supply monitoring:
less than 1s
 AC input imbalance monitoring, sampling synchronization monitoring : 15s
3.3.3 Trip Circuit Supervision
The circuit breaker tripping control circuit can be monitored by a binary input. Figure 3.3.1
shows a typical scheme. When the trip circuit is complete, a small current flows through the
binary input, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and the trip coil. This current flows for both
the breaker open and closed conditions. Then logic signal of the binary input circuit TC FAIL is
"1".
If the trip supply is lost or if a connection becomes an open circuit, then the binary input resets
and TC FAIL is "0". Figure 3.3.2 shows the scheme logic. A trip circuit fail alarm TCSV is
output when TC FAIL is "0".
The monitoring is enabled by setting the scheme switch [TCSPEN] to "ON" or "OPT-ON".
When "OPT-ON" is selected, the monitoring is enabled only while CB is closed.
GRD110 Circuit Breaker
Trip Output CB Trip Coil -ve Trip

+ve
Trip Supply
Supply
Binary CB Aux.
Input Contacts
Figure 3.3.1 Trip Circuit Supervision
t 0
TC FAIL 1 & TCSV
(BI command)
0.4s
CB status “closed”
& 1
"OPT-ON"
[TCSPEN]
"ON"
+
Figure 3.3.2 Supervision Scheme Logic
 71 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
3.3.4 Circuit Breaker Monitoring
The relay provides the following circuit breaker monitoring functions.
Circuit Breaker State Monitoring

Circuit breaker state monitoring is provided for checking healthy of circuit breaker (CB). If two
binary inputs are programmed to the functions ‘CB CONT OPN’(CBOPN) and ‘CB CONT
CLS’(CBCLS), then the CB state monitoring function becomes active. In normal circumstances
these inputs are in opposite states. Figure 3.3.3 shows the scheme logic. If both show the same
state during five seconds, then a CB state alarm CBSV outputs and “Err:CB” and “CB err” are
displayed in LCD message and event record message respectively.
The monitoring can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [CBSMEN].
t 0
CB CONT OPN 1 CBSV
=1 &
(BI command)
5.0s
CB CONT CLS
(BI command)
[CBSMEN]
"ON"
+
Figure 3.3.3 CB State Monitoring Scheme Logic
Normally open and normally closed contacts of the CB are connected to binary inputs BIm and
BIn respectively, and functions of BIm and BIn are set to “CBOPN=ON” and “CBCLS=ON”.
(Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.)
Circuit Breaker Condition Monitoring

Periodic maintenance of CB is required for checking healthy of the trip circuit, the operation
mechanism and the interrupting capability. Generally, maintenance is based on a time interval or
a number of fault current interruptions.
The following CB condition monitoring functions are provided to determine time for
maintenance of CB:
 Trip is counted for maintenance of the trip circuit and CB operation mechanism. The trip
counter increments the number of tripping operations performed. An alarm is issued and
informs user of time for maintenance when the count exceeds a user-defined setting TCALM.
The trip count alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting the scheme switch [TCAEN].
 Sum of the broken current quantity Iy is counted for monitoring the interrupting capability
of CB. The Iy counter increments the value of current to the power ‘y’, recorded at the time
of issue of the tripping signal, on a phase by phase basis. For oil circuit breakers, the dielectric
withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of I2t, and maintenance such as oil
changes, etc., may be required. ‘I’ is the fault current broken by CB. ‘t’ is the arcing time
within the interrupter tank and it cannot be determined accurately. Therefore, ‘y’ is normally
set to 2 to monitor the broken current squared. For other circuit breaker types, especially
those for HV systems, ‘y’ may be set lower, typically 1.0. An alarm is issued when the count
for any phase exceeds a user-defined setting IyALM. The Iy count alarm can be enabled or
disabled by setting the scheme switch [IyAEN].
 Operating time monitoring is provided for CB mechanism maintenance. It checks CB
operating time and the need for mechanism maintenance is informed if the CB operation is
slow. The operating time monitor records the time between issuing the tripping signal and the
 72 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
phase currents falling to zero. An alarm is issued when the operating time for any phase
exceeds a user-defined setting OPTALM. The operating time is set in relation to the specified
interrupting time of the CB. The operating time alarm can be enabled or disabled by setting
the scheme switch [OPTAEN].
For maintenance program, it should be complied with the switchgear manufacturer’s
instructions.
The CB condition monitoring functions are triggered each time a trip is issued, and they can also
be triggered by an external device via binary input EXT TRIP3PH (EXT3PH) or EXT TRIPPH
(EXTPH) as shown in Figure 3.3.4. (Refer to Section 4.2.6.8.)
(+) () External trip GRD110 Binary input setting

three-phase [EXT3PH]
BIa command EXT3PH
BIa
"ON"
External trip
A-phase [EXTAPH]
BIb command EXTAPH
BIb
"ON"
Figure 3.3.4 Binary Input Setting for CB Condition Monitoring
3.3.5 Failure Alarms
When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message,
LED indication, external alarm and event recording. Table 3.3.1 summarizes the supervision
items and alarms.
The LCD messages are shown on the "Auto-supervision" screen, which is displayed
automatically when a failure is detected or displayed by pressing the VIEW key. The event
record messages are shown on the "Event record" screen by opening the "Record" sub-menu.
The alarms are retained until the failure is recovered.
The alarms can be disabled collectively by setting the scheme switch [AMF] to "OFF". The
setting is used to block unnecessary alarms during commissioning, test or maintenance.
When the Watchdog Timer detects that the software is not running normally, LCD display and
event recording of the failure may not function normally.
Table 3.3.1 Supervision Items and Alarms
Supervision Item LCD LED LED External Event record Message

Message "IN SERVICE" "ALARM" alarm
CT err
AC input imbalance monitoring Err: CT On/Off (2) On (4)
Relay fail or Relay fail-A (2)
A/D accuracy check
(1) Off On (4) Relay fail
Memory monitoring
Watchdog Timer ---- Off On (4) ----
DC supply monitoring Err: DC Off (3) Off Relay fail-A
Trip circuit supervision Err:TC On On Off TC err, Relay fail-A
CB state monitoring Err:CB On On Off CB err, Relay fail-A
 73 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Supervision Item LCD LED LED External Event record Message

Message "IN SERVICE" "ALARM" alarm
CB condition monitoring ALM:TP On On Off TP COUNT ALM,
Trip count alarm COUNT Relay fail-A
Operating time alarm ALM: OP time On On Off OP time ALM, Relay fail-A
Iy count alarm ALM:IY On On Off IY-A ALM, IY-B ALM or
IY-C ALM, Relay fail-A
(1): Diverse messages are provided as expressed with " Err:---" in the table in Section 6.7.2.
(2): The LED is on when the scheme switch [SVCNT] is set to "ALM" and off when set to "ALM &
BLK" (refer to Section 3.3.6). The message "Relay fail-A" is recorded when the scheme switch
[SVCNT] is set to "ALM".
(3): Whether the LED is lit or not depends on the degree of the voltage drop.
(4): The binary output relay "FAIL" operates except for DC supply fail condition.
3.3.6 Trip Blocking
When a failure is detected by the following supervision items, the trip function is blocked as long
as the failure exists, and is restored when the failure is removed.
 A/D accuracy check
 Memory monitoring
 Watchdog Timer
When a fault is detected by the AC input imbalance monitoring, the scheme switch [SVCNT]
setting can be used to determine if both tripping is blocked and an alarm is output (ALM&BLK),
or if only an alarm is output (ALM).
3.3.7 Setting
The setting element necessary for the automatic supervision and its setting range are shown in the
table below.

[SVCNT] ALM&BLK / ALM ALM&BLK Alarming and blocking or alarming only
[TCSPEN] OFF/ON/OPT-ON OFF Trip circuit supervision
[CBSMEN] OFF/ON OFF CB state monitoring
[TCAEN] OFF/ON OFF Trip count alarm
[IyAEN] OFF/ON OFF Iy count alarm
[OPTAEN] OFF/ON OFF Operate time alarm
TCALM 1 - 10000 1 10000 Trip count alarm threshold setting
IyALM 10 – 10000 E6 E6 10000 Iy alarm threshold setting
YVALUE 1.0 – 2.0 0.1 2.0 y value setting
OPTALM 100 – 5000 ms 10 ms 1000 ms Operate time alarm threshold setting
The scheme switch [SVCNT] is set in the "Application" sub-menu. Other scheme switches are
set in the "Scheme sw" sub-menu.
 74 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
3.4 Recording Function

The GRD110 is provided with the following recording functions:
Fault recording
Event recording
Disturbance recording
These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.
3.4.1 Fault Recording
Fault recording is started by a tripping command of the GRD110 and the following items are
recorded for one fault:
Date and time
Trip mode
Faulted phase
Power system quantities
Up to the 8 most-recent faults are stored as fault records. If a new fault occurs when 8 faults have
been stored, the record of the oldest fault is deleted and the record of the latest fault is then
stored.
Date and time occurrence

This is the time at which a tripping command has been initiated.
The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock.
Trip mode
This shows the protection scheme that output the tripping command.
Faulted phase
This is the phase to which a operating command is output.

The following power system quantities in pre-faults and post-faults are recorded.
- Magnitude of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)
- Magnitude of zero sequence current (Ie, Ise)
- Magnitude of positive and negative sequence currents (I1, I2)
- The ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I2/I1)
- Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%)
The displayed power system quantities depend on relay model and its [APPL] setting as shown in
Table 3.4.1.
The zero sequence current Ie in “3P” setting of the model 520 is calculated from the three phase
input currents and the calculated Ie (I0) is displayed. The Ie in other settings and models is
displayed the current fed from CT.
 75 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Table 3.4.1 Displayed Power System Quantities
Model 500 Model 520

3P 2P 1P 3P 2P 1P
Phase current Ia , Ib , Ic Ia , Ic － Ia , Ib , Ic Ia , Ic －
Zero sequence current Ie Ie Ie Ie, Ise Ie, Ise Ie, Ise
Positive and negative
I1 , I2 －－ I1 , I2 －－
sequence current
Ratio of Negative to positive
I2 / I1 －－ I2 / I1 －－
sequence current
Percentage of thermal
THM THM － THM THM －
capacity
3.4.2 Event Recording
The events shown in Appendix C are recorded with the 1 ms resolution time-tag when the status
changes. For BI1 to BI8 command, the user can select the recording items and their status change
mode to initiate recording as below.
One of the following four modes is selectable.
Modes Setting
Not to record the event. N
To record the event when the status changes to "operate". O
To record the event when the status changes to "reset". R
To record the event when the status changes both to "operate" and "reset". B
For the setting, see the Section 4.2.6.5. The default setting is "B"
Up to 480 records can be stored. If an additional event occurs when 480 records have been stored,
the oldest event record is deleted and the latest event record is then stored.
3.4.3 Disturbance Recording
Disturbance recording is started when the overcurrent starter element operates or a tripping
command is initiated. The records include maximum four analogue signals (Ia, Ib, Ic, Ie), 32
binary signals and the dates and times at which recording started. Any binary signal shown in
Appendix B can be assigned by the binary signal setting of disturbance record.
The LCD display only shows the dates and times of disturbance records stored. Details can be
displayed on a PC. For how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the PC software
instruction manual.
The pre-fault recording time is fixed at 0.3s and post-fault recording time can be set between 0.1
and 3.0s.
The number of records stored depends on the post-fault recording time. The approximate
relationship between the post-fault recording time and the number of records stored is shown in
Table 3.4.2.
Note: If the recording time setting is changed, the records stored so far are deleted.
 76 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Table 3.4.2 Post Fault Recording Time and Number of Disturbance Records Stored
Recording time 0.1s 0.5s 1.0s 1.5s 2.0s 2.5s 3.0s

50Hz 40 25 15 10 9 7 6
60Hz 40 20 10 9 7 6 5
Settings
The elements necessary for initiating a disturbance recording and their setting ranges are shown
in the table below.
OC 0.5-250.0 A 0.1 A 10.0 A Overcurrent detection
(0.10-50.00 A 0.01 A 2.00 A) (*)
EF 0.5-125.0 A 0.1 A 3.0 A Earth fault detection
(0.10-25.00 A 0.01 A 0.60A)
SE 0.02-5.00 A 0.01 A 1.00 A Sensitive earth fault detection
(0.004-1.000 A 0.001 A 0.200 A)
NPS 0.5-10.0 A 0.1 A 2.0 A Negative sequence overcurrent detection
(0.10-2.00 A 0.01 A 0.40 A)
(*) Current values shown in the parentheses are for the case of a 1A rating. Other current values are
for the case of a 5A rating.
Starting the disturbance recording by a tripping command or the starter element listed above is
enabled or disabled by setting the following scheme switches.

[Trip] OFF/ON ON Start by tripping command
[BI] OFF/ON ON Start by Binary Input signal
[OC] OFF/ON ON Start by OC operation
[EF] OFF/ON ON Start by EF operation
[SEF] OFF/ON ON Start by SEF operation
[NPS] OFF/ON ON Start by NPS operation
 77 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
3.5 Metering Function

The GRD110 performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The
measurement data shown below is renewed every second and displayed on the LCD of the relay
front panel or on the local or remote PC.
- Magnitude of phase current (Ia, Ib, Ic)
- Magnitude of zero sequence current (Ie, Ise)
- Magnitude of positive and negative sequence currents (I1, I2)
- The ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I2/I1)
- Percentage of thermal capacity (THM%)
- Maximum phase current (Iamax, Ibmax, Icmax)
- Maximum zero sequence current (Iemax, Isemax)
- Maximum negative sequence currents (I2max)
- Maximum ratio of negative to positive sequence current (I21 max)
The above system quantities are displayed in values on the primary side or on the secondary side
as determined by a setting. To display accurate values, it is necessary to set the CT ratio as well.
For the setting method, see "Setting the metering" in 4.2.6.6 and "Setting the parameter" in
4.2.6.7. In the case of the maximum value displays above, the measured quantity is averaged over
a rolling 15 minute time window, and the maximum recorded average value is shown on the
display screen.
The displayed power system quantities depend on relay model and its [APPL] setting as shown in
Table 3.4.1.
The zero sequence current Ie in “3P” setting of the model 520 is calculated from the three phase
input currents and the calculated Ie (I0) is displayed. The Ie in other settings and models is
displayed the current fed from CT.
 78 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
4. User Interface
4.1 Outline of User Interface
The user can access the relay from the front or rear panel.
Local communication with the relay is also possible using a personal computer (PC) via an
RS232C port. Furthermore, remote communication is also possible using RSM (Relay Setting
and Monitoring) or IEC60870-5-103 communication via RS485 port.
This section describes the front panel configuration and the basic configuration of the menu tree
of the local human machine communication ports and HMI (Human Machine Interface).
4.1.1 Front Panel
As shown in Figure 3.1.3, the front panel is provided with a liquid crystal display (LCD), light
emitting diodes (LED), operation keys, and RS232C connector.
LCD
The LCD screen, provided with a 2-line, 16-character display and back-light, provides the user
with information such as records, statuses and settings. The LCD screen is normally unlit, but
pressing the VIEW key will display the digest screen and pressing any key other than VIEW
and RESET will display the menu screen.
These screens are turned off by pressing the RESET key or END key. If any display is left for
5 minutes or longer without operation, the back-light will go off.
LED
There are 6 LED displays. The signal labels and LED colors are defined as follows:
Label Color Remarks
IN SERVICE Green Lit when the relay is in service and flickered when the relay is in “Test” menu.
TRIP Red Lit when a trip command is issued.
ALARM Red Lit when a failure is detected.
(LED1) Yellow
(LED2) Yellow
(LED3) Yellow
LED1, LED2 and LED3 are configurable. For the setting, see Section 4.2.6.10.
The TRIP LED lights up once the relay is operating and remains lit even after the trip command
goes off. The TRIP LED can be turned off by pressing the RESET key. Other LEDs are lit as
long as a signal is present and the RESET key is invalid while the signal is being maintained.
 79 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Operation keys
The operation keys are used to display records, status, and set values on the LCD, as well as to
input or change set values. The function of each operation key is as follows:
 , , , : Used to move between lines displayed on a screen and to enter numerical
values and text strings.
 CANCEL : Used to cancel entries and return to the upper screen.
 END : Used to end the entering operation, return to the upper screen or turn off
the display.
 ENTER : Used to store or establish entries.
VIEW and RESET keys

Pressing VIEW key displays digest screens such as "Metering", "Latest fault",
"Auto-supervision", "Alarm display" and "Indication".
Pressing RESET key turns off the display.
RS232C connector
The RS-232C connector is a 9-way D-type connector for serial RS232C connection with a local
personal computer.
 80 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
4.1.2 Communication Ports
The following two interfaces are mounted as communication ports:

 RS232C port
 RS485 port
RS232C port
This connector is a standard 9-way D-type connector for serial port RS232C transmission and is
mounted on the front panel. By connecting a personal computer to this connector, setting
operation and display functions can be performed.
RS485 port
The RS485 port is used for the RSM (Remote Setting and Monitoring system) via the protocol
converter G1PR2 and IEC60870-5-103 communication via BCU/RTU (Bay Control Unit /
Remote Terminal Unit) to connect between relays and to construct a network communication
system. (See Figure 4.4.1 in Section 4.4.)
One or two RS485 ports (COM1 and COM2) is provided on the rear of the relay as shown in
Figure 4.1.1. In the relay provided with two RS485 ports, COM1 is used for the RSM or
IEC60870-5-103 communication, and COM2 used for IEC60870-5-103 communication. When
the COM1 is used for IEC60870-5-103 communication, the COM2 cannot be used for
IEC60870-5-103 communication.
TB3 TB4 COM2

TB1
RS485 TB1 TB3 RS485
connection connection
COM1 terminal
terminal
TB2
TB2
E E
Rear view Rear view

(a) One port (b) Two ports
Figure 4.1.1 Location of RS485 Port
 81 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
4.2 Operation of the User Interface

The user can access such functions as recording, measurement, relay setting and testing with the
LCD display and operation keys.
4.2.1 LCD and LED Displays
Displays during normal operation

When the GRD110 is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and the LCD is
off.
Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off to display the digest screens which are "Indication",
"Metering1", "Metering2", "Metering3", "Metering4", "Metering5", "Latest fault",
"Auto-supervision" and "Alarm Display" screens in turn. "Latest fault", "Auto-supervision" and
"Alarm Display" screens are displayed only when there is some data. The following are the digest
screens and can be displayed without entering the menu screens.
Indication
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ]
Metering1
I a   .   k A Not available for APPL=1P setting.
Metering2
I b   .   k A Not available for APPL=1P and 2P setting.
Metering3
I c   .   k A Not available for APPL=1P setting.
Metering4
I e   .   k A
Metering5
I s e   .    k A Not available for models 500.
To clear the latched indications (latched LEDs, LCD screen of Latest fault), press RESET key
for 3 seconds or more.
For any display, the back-light is automatically turned off after five minutes.
Indication
This screen shows the status of elements assigned as a virtual LED.
I N D 1 [ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ]
I N D 2 [ 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ]
Status of element,
Elements depend on user setting. 1: Operate, 0: Not operate (Reset)
 82 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Displays in tripping
Latest fault
P h a s e A B C E : Faulted phases.
OC 1 : Tripping element
If a fault occurs and a tripping command is output when the LCD is off, the red "TRIP" LED and
other configurable LED if signals assigned to trigger by tripping
Press the VIEW key to scroll the LCD screen to read the rest of messages.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED3) are assigned to latch signals by trigger of
tripping, press the RESET key more than 3s until the LCD screens relight. Confirm turning off
the configurable LEDs. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 1.
2) Then, press the RESET key again on the "Latest fault" screen in short period, confirm turning
off the "TRIP" LED. Refer to Table 4.2.1 Step 2.
3) When only the "TRIP" LED is go off by pressing the RESET key in short period, press the
RESET key again to reset remained LEDs in the manner 1) on the "Latest fault" screen or other
digest screens. LED1 through LED3 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active
state.
Table 4.2.1 Turning off latch LED operation
LED lighting status

Operation "TRIP" LED Configurable LED
(LED1 – LED3)
Step 1 Press the RESET key more than 3s on
the "Latest fault" screen
continue to lit turn off
Step 2 Then, press the RESET key in short

period on the "Latest fault" screen
turn off
When any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function.
To return from menu screen to the digest "Latest fault" screen, do the following:
 Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
 Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
 Press the VIEW key to display the digest "Latest fault" screen.
 83 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Displays in automatic supervision operation

Auto-supervision
E r r : R OM , A / D
If the automatic supervision function detects a failure while the LCD is off, the
"Auto-supervision" screen is displayed automatically, showing the location of the failure, and the
"ALARM" LED lights.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and
"Latest fault" screens.
Press the RESET key to turn off the LEDs and LCD display. However, if the failure continues,
the "ALARM" LED remains lit.
After recovery from a failure, the "ALARM" LED and "Auto-supervision" display turn off
automatically.
If a failure is detected while any of the screens is displayed, the current screen remains displayed
and the "ALARM" LED lights.
Notes:
1) When configurable LEDs (LED1 through LED3) are assigned to latch signals by issuing an
alarm, press the RESET key more than 3s until all LEDs reset except "IN SERVICE" LED.
2) When configurable LED is still lit by pressing RESET key in short period, press RESET
key again to reset remained LED in the above manner.
3) LED1 through LED3 will remain lit in case the assigned signals are still active state.
While any of the menu screens is displayed, the VIEW and RESET keys do not function. To
return to the digest "Auto-supervision" screen, do the following:
 Return to the top screen of the menu by repeatedly pressing the END key.
 Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
 Press the VIEW key to display the digest screen.
 Press the RESET key to turn off the LCD.
Alarm Display
Alarm Display (ALM1 to ALM4)
             
        : A L M1
The four alarm screens can be provided, and their text messages are defined by user. (For setting,
see Section 4.2.6.8) These alarms are raised by associated binary inputs.
Press the VIEW key to display other digest screens in turn including the "Metering" and
"Latest fault" screens.
To clear the Alarm Display, press RESET key. The clearing is available after displaying up to
ALM4.
 84 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
4.2.2 Relay Menu
Figure 4.2.1 shows the menu hierarchy in the GRD110. The menu has five sub-menus, "Record",
"Status", "Set. (view)", "Set. (change)", and "Test". For details of the menu hierarchy, see
Appendix E.
Menu Record F. record

E. record
D. record
Counter
Status Metering
Binary I/O
Relay element
Time sync.
Clock adjust.
LCD contrast
Set. (view) Version

Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Set. (change) Password

Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P
LED
Test Switch
Binary O/P
Figure 4.2.1 Relay Menu
 85 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Record
In the "Record" menu, the fault records event records, disturbance records and counts such as trip
count and ΣIy count can be displayed or erased.
Status
The "Status" menu displays the power system quantities, binary input and output status, relay
measuring element status, signal source for time synchronisation (BI or RSM), adjusts a clock
and LCD contrast.
Set. (view)
The "Set. (view)" menu displays the relay version, description, relay address and baud rate in
RSM, the current settings of record, status, protection, binary inputs, configurable binary outputs
and configurable LEDs.
Set. (change)
The "Set. (change)" menu is used to change the settings of password, description, relay address
and baud rate in RSM or IEC60870-5-103 communication, record, status, protection, binary
inputs, configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs.
Since this is an important menu and is used to change settings related to relay tripping, it has
password security protection.
Test
The "Test" menu is used to set testing switches and to forcibly operate binary output relays.
When the LCD is off, press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys to display the top
"MENU" screen and then proceed to the relay menus.
M E N U
 R e c o r d
 S t a t u s
 S e t . ( v i e w )
 S e t . ( c h a n g e )
 T e s t
To display the "MENU" screen when the digest screen is displayed, press the RESET key to
turn off the LCD, then press any key other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
Press the END key when the top screen is displayed to turn off the LCD.
An example of the sub-menu screen is shown below. The top line shows the hierarchical layer.
The last item is not displayed for all the screens. " " or " " displayed on the far right shows
that lower or upper lines exist.
To move the cursor downward or upward for setting or for viewing other lines not displayed on
the window, use the and keys.
/ 4 T r i p
 S c h e m e s w
 P r o t . e l e m e n t
 86 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
To return to the higher screen or move from the right side screen to the left side screen in
Appendix E, press the END key.
The CANCEL key can also be used to return to the higher screen but it must be used carefully
because it may cancel entries made so far.
To move between screens of the same hierarchical depth, first return to the higher screen and
then move to the lower screen.
4.2.3 Displaying Records
The sub-menu of "Record" is used to display fault records, event records, disturbance records
and counts such as trip count and ΣIy count.
4.2.3.1 Displaying Fault Records

To display fault records, do the following:
 Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET
keys.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record" sub-menu.
/ 1 R e c o r d
 F . r e c o r d
 E . r e c o r d
 D . r e c o r d
 C o u n t e r
 Select "F. record" to display the "F. record" screen.

/ 2 F . r e c o r d
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r
 Select "Display" to display the dates and times of fault records stored in the relay from the top
in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 F . r e c o r d
# 1 1 6 / J u l / 2 0 0 1
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 0 3 1
# 2 2 0 / M a y / 2 0 0 1
1 5 : 2 9 : 2 2 . 1 0 1
# 3 0 4 / F e b / 2 0 0 1
1 1 : 5 4 : 5 3 . 2 9 9
# 4 2 8 / J a n / 2 0 0 1
0 7 : 3 0 : 1 8 . 4 1 2
 Move the cursor to the fault record line to be displayed using the and keys and press the
ENTER key to display the details of the fault record.
 87 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
/ 4 F . r e c o r d # 1
1 6 / J u l / 2 0 0 1
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 0 3 1
O C 1 Trip element
P h a s e A B C .
P r e f a u l t v a l u e s
I b   .   k A Not available for APPL=1P and 2P settings.
I e   .   k A
I 1   .   k A Not available for APPL=1P and 2P settings.
I 2 / I 1   .   Not available for APPL=1P and 2P settings.
F a u l t v a l u e s
I b   .   k A Not available for APPL=1P and 2P settings.
I e   .   k A
T H M    .  % Not available for APPL=1P setting.
The lines which are not displayed in the window can be displayed by pressing the and keys.
To clear all the fault records, do the following:

 Open the "Record" sub-menu.
 Select "F. record" to display the "F. record" screen.
 Select "Clear" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r r e c o r d s ?
E N D = Y C A N C E L = N
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the fault records stored in non-volatile memory.
If all fault records have been cleared, the "Latest fault" screen of the digest screens is not
displayed.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.
4.2.3.2 Displaying Event Records

To display event records, do the following:
 Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET
keys.
 Select "E. record" to display the "E. record" screen.
/ 2 E . r e c o r d
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r
 88 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 Select "Display" to display the events with date from the top in new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 E . r e c o r d
2 1 / S e p / 2 0 0 2 4 8 0
O C 1 - A t r i p O n
2 1 / S e p / 2 0 0 2 4 7 9
O C 1 - A O n
The time is displayed by pressing the key.
/ 3 E . r e c o r d
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 1 1
O C 1 - A t r i p O n
1 3 : 2 2 : 4 5 . 2 1 1
O C 1 - A O n
Press the key to return the screen with date.
To clear all the event records, do the following:

 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the event records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.3 Displaying Disturbance Records

Details of disturbance records can be displayed on the PC screen only (*); the LCD displays only
the recorded date and time for all disturbances stored in the relay. They are displayed in the
following sequence.
(*) For the display on the PC screen, refer to RSM100 manual.
 Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.

 Select "D. record" to display the "D. record" screen.
/ 2 D . r e c o r d
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r
 Select "Display" to display the date and time of the disturbance records from the top in
new-to-old sequence.
/ 3 D . r e c o r d
# 1 1 6 / J u l / 2 0 0 1
1 8 : 1 3 : 5 7 . 4 0 1
 89 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
# 2 2 0 / M a y / 2 0 0 1
1 5 : 2 9 : 2 2 . 3 8 8
# 3 0 4 / F e b / 2 0 0 1
1 1 : 5 4 : 5 3 . 4 4 4
# 4 2 8 / J a n / 2 0 0 1
0 7 : 3 0 : 1 8 . 8 7 6
To clear all the disturbance records, do the following:

 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all the disturbance records stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.3.4 Displaying Counter

 Open the top "MENU" screen by pressing any keys other than the VIEW and RESET keys.
 Select "Counter" to display the "Counter" screen.
/ 2 C o u n t e r
 D i s p l a y
 C l e a r T r i p s
 C l e a r T r i p s A (*)
 C l e a r T r i p s B (*)
 C l e a r T r i p s C (*)
 C l e a r  I ^ y A
 C l e a r  I ^ y B
 C l e a r  I ^ y C
 C l e a r A R C s
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Clear Trips" option is not available.
 Select "Display" to display the counts stored in the relay.

/ 3 C o u n t e r
T r i p s     
T r i p s A      (*)
T r i p s B      (*)
T r i p s C      (*)
 I ^ y A       E 6
 I ^ y B       E 6
 I ^ y C       E 6
A R C s     
(*) Note: These settings are only available when single phase External Trip BI functions
are used. In this case, the main "Trips" option is not available.
 90 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
To clear each count, do the following:

 Select "Clear Trips" to display the following confirmation screen.
C l e a r T r i p s ?
 Select "Clear Trips A" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s A ?
 Select "Clear Trips B" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s B ?
 Select "Clear Trips C" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r T r i p s C ?
 Select "Clear  I^yA" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r  I ^ y A ?
 Select "Clear  I^yB" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r  I ^ y B ?
 Select "Clear  I^yC" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r  I ^ y C ?
 Select "Clear ARCs" to display the following confirmation screen.

C l e a r A R C s ?
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear the count stored in non-volatile memory.
4.2.4 Displaying the Status
From the sub-menu of "Status", the following status condition can be displayed on the LCD:
Metering data of the protected line, apparatus, etc.
Status of binary inputs and outputs
Status of measuring elements output
Status of time synchronisation source
Status of clock adjustment
Status of LCD contrast
 91 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
The data are updated every second.
4.2.4.1 Displaying Metering Data

To display metering data on the LCD, do the following:
 Select "Status" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Status" screen.
/ 1 S t a t u s
 M e t e r i n g
 B i n a r y I / O
 R e l a y e l e m e n t
 T i m e s y n c .
 C l o c k a d j u s t .
 L C D c o n t r a s t
 Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.

/ 2 M e t e r i n g
I a   .   K A Not available for APPL=1P setting.
I b   .   K A Not available for APPL=1P and 2P settings.
I c   .   K A Not available for APPL=1P setting.
I e   .   K A
I s e   .    K A Not available for models 500.
I 1   .   K A Not available for APPL=1P and 2P settings.
I 2   .   K A Not available for APPL=1P and 2P settings.
T H M    .  % Not available for APPL=1P setting.
I a m a x   .   K A Not available for APPL=1P setting.
I b m a x   .   K A Not available for APPL=1P and 2P settings.
I c m a x   .   K A Not available for APPL=1P setting.
I e m a x   .   K A
I s e m a x   .    K A Not available for models 500.
I 2 m a x   .   K A Not available for APPL=1P and 2P settings.
I 2 1 m a x   .   Not available for APPL=1P and 2P settings.
To clear all max data, do the following:

 Press the RESET key on any max demand screen (primary or secondary) to display the
following confirmation screen.
C l e a r m a x ?
 Press the END (= Y) key to clear all max data stored in non-volatile memory.
If the primary side unit (A) is required, select 2(=Pri-A) on the "Metering" screen. See Section
4.2.6.6.
Note: When changing the units (kA/A) of primary side current with RSM100, press the "Units"
button which is indicated in the primary side screen.
4.2.4.2 Displaying the Status of Binary Inputs and Outputs

To display the binary input and output status, do the following:
 Select "Binary I/O" to display the binary input and output status.
 92 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
O P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
The display format is shown below.
[       ]
Input (IP) BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8
Output (OP) BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 FAIL
Line 1 shows the binary input status. BI1 to BI8 correspond to each binary input signal. For the
binary input signal, see Appendix B and G. The status is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at
the photo-coupler output circuit.
Line 2 shows the binary output status. All binary outputs BO1 to BO7 are configurable. The
status of these outputs is expressed with logical level "1" or "0" at the input circuit of the output
relay driver. That is, the output relay is energised when the status is "1".
To display all the lines, press the and keys.
4.2.4.3 Displaying the Status of Measuring Elements

To display the status of measuring elements on the LCD, do the following:
 Select 3 "Ry element" to display the status of the relay elements.
/ 2 R y e l e m e n t
A O C 1
- 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ]
B O C 1
- 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ]
C O C 1
- 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ]
E F 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ]
S E 1 - 4 [ 0 0 0 0 ]
A U C 1
- 2 [ 0 0 ]
B U C 1
- 2 [ 0 0 ]
C U C 1
- 2 [ 0 0 ]
T H M [ 0 0 ]
N P S , B C [ 0 0 0 ]
C B F A B C [ 0 0 0 ]
C o l d L d [ 0 0 0 0 ]
I C D [ 0 0 0 ]
The displayed elements depend on relay model. (See Table 1.1.1 in Section 1.)
The operation status of phase and residual overcurrent elements are shown as below.
[    ]
A OC1-4 OC1 OC2 OC3 OC4 A phase OC elements
B OC1-4 OC1 OC2 OC3 OC4 B phase OC elements
C OC1-4 OC1 OC2 OC3 OC4 C phase OC elements
EF1-4 EF1 EF2 EF3 EF4
SE1-4 SE1 SE2 SE3 SE4
A UC1-2 UC1 UC2 - - A phase UC elements
B UC1-2 UC1 UC2 - - B phase UC elements
 93 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
C UC1-2 UC1 UC2 - - C phase UC elements

THM Alarm Trip - -
NPS, BC NPS1 NPS2 - BC
CBFABC A B C -
Cold Ld 0 1 2 3 Cold Load state
ICD ICD-A ICD-B ICD-C 2f detector
The status of each element is expressed with logical level "1" or "0". Status "1" means the
element is in operation.
4.2.4.4 Displaying the Status of the Time Synchronisation Source

The internal clock of the GRD110 can be synchronised with external clocks such as the binary
input signal clock, RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) clock or IEC60870-5-103. To
display on the LCD whether these clocks are active (=Act.) or inactive (=Inact.) and which clock
the relay is synchronised with, do the following:
 Select "Time sync." to display the status of time synchronisation sources.
/ 2 T i m e s y n c .
 B I : A c t .
R S M : I n a c t .
I E C : I n a c t .
The asterisk on the far left shows that the internal clock is synchronised with the marked source
clock. If the marked source clock is inactive, the internal clock runs locally.
Note: If the Binary input signal has not been detected for one hour or more after the last detection, the
status becomes "inactive".
For details of the setting time synchronisation, see Section 4.2.6.6.
4.2.4.5 Clock Adjustment

To adjust the clock when the internal clock is running locally, do the following:
 Select "Clock adjust." to display the setting screen.
/ 2 1 2 / N o v / 2 0 0 1
2 2 : 5 6 : 1 9
M i n u t e
5 6 _
H o u r
2 2
D a y
1 2
M o n t h
1 1
Y e a r
2 0 0 1
Line 1 and 2 show the current date and time. The time can be adjusted only when the clock is
running locally. When [BI], [RSM] or [IEC] is active, the adjustment is invalid.
 Enter a numerical value for each item and press the ENTER key. For details to enter a
 94 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
numerical value, see 4.2.6.1.

 Press the END key to adjust the internal clock to the set hours without fractions and return
to the previous screen.
If a date which does not exist in the calendar is set and END is pressed, "**** Error ****" is
displayed on the top line and the adjustment is discarded. Return to the normal screen by pressing
the CANCEL key and adjust again.
4.2.4.6 LCD Contrast

To adjust the contrast of LCD screen, do the following:
 Select "LCD contrast" to display the setting screen.
/ 2 L C D c o n t r a s t
 Press the or key to adjust the contrast. The characters on the screen become thin by
pressing the key and deep by pressing the key.
4.2.5 Viewing the Settings
The sub-menu "Set. (view)" is used to view the settings made using the sub-menu "Set.
(change)".
The following items are displayed:
Relay version
Description
Relay address and baud rate in the RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or
IEC60870-5-103 communication
Record setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
Enter an item on the LCD to display each item as described in the previous sections.
4.2.5.1 Relay Version

To view the relay version, do the following.
 Press the "Set.(view)" on the main menu.
/ 1 S e t . ( v i e w )
 V e r s i o n
 D e s c r i p t i o n
 C o m m s
 R e c o r d
 S t a t u s
 95 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 P r o t e c t i o n
 B i n a r y I / P
 B i n a r y O / P
 L E D
 Press the "Version" on the "Set.(view)" menu.

/ 2 V e r s i o n
 R e l a y t y p e
 S e r i a l N o .
 S o f t w a r e
 Select "Relay type" to display the relay type form and model number.
G R D 1 1 0 - 5 0 0 A - 1 1
- 1 1
 Select "Serial number" to display the relay manufacturing number.

 Select "Software" to display the relay software type form and version.
G S 1 D M 1 - 0 8 - 
4.2.5.2 Settings
The "Description", "Comms", "Record", "Status", "Protection", "Binary I/P", "Binary O/P" and
"LED" screens display the current settings input using the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6 Changing the Settings
The "Set. (change)" sub-menu is used to make or change settings for the following items:
Password
Description
Relay address and baud rate in the RSM or IEC60870-5-103 communication
Recording setting
Status setting
Protection setting
Binary input setting
Binary output setting
LED setting
All of the above settings except the password can be seen using the "Set. (view)" sub-menu.
CAUTION
Modification of settings : Care should be taken when modifying settings for "active group",
"scheme switch" and "protection element" in the "Protection" menu. Dependencies exist
between the settings in the various menus, with settings in one menu becoming active (or
inactive) depending on the selection made in another menu. Therefore, it is recommended that all
necessary settings changes be made while the circuit breaker tripping circuit is disconnected.
Alternatively, if it is necessary to make settings changes with the tripping circuit active, then it is
recommended to enter the new settings into a different settings group, and then change the
"active group" setting, thus ensuring that all new settings become valid simultaneously.
 96 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
4.2.6.1 Setting Method

There are three setting methods as follows:
- To enter a selected item
- To enter a text string
- To enter numerical values
To enter a selected item

If a screen as shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows.
The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and
keys. If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
/ 1 S e t . ( c h a n g e)
 P a s s w o r d
 C o m m s
 R e c o r d
 S t a t u s
 P r o t e c t i o n
 B i n a r y I / P
 L E D
 Move the cursor to a setting item.
 Press the ENTER key.
To enter a text string

Texts strings are entered under "Plant name" or "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
 P l a n t n a m e
To select a character, use keys , , and to move blinking cursor down, up, left and right.
"" and "" on each of lines 4, 8 and 10 indicate a space and backspace, respectively. A
maximum of 22 characters can be entered.
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z 
a b c d e f g
h i j k l m n
o p q r s t u
v w x y z 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 
( )   @_ {
}  /    
 ! “ # $ %&
‘ : ; , . ˆ `
 97 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 Set the cursor position in the bracket by selecting "" or "" and pressing the ENTER
key.
 Move the blinking cursor to a selecting character.
 Press the ENTER key to enter the blinking character at the cursor position in the brackets.
 Press the END key to confirm the entry and return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered character, do either of the following:
 Discard the character by selecting "" and pressing the ENTER key and enter the new
character.
 Discard the whole entry by pressing the CANCEL key and restart the entry from the first.
To enter numerical values

When the screen shown below is displayed, perform setting as follows:
The number to the left of the cursor shows the current setting or default setting set at shipment.
The cursor can be moved to upper or lower lines within the screen by pressing the and
keys. If setting (change) is not required, skip the line with the and keys.
/ 4 T i m e / s t a r t e r
T i m e s
2 . 0 _
O C A
2 . 0 0
E F A
0 . 6 0
S E F A
0 . 2 0 0
N P S A
0 . 4 0
 Move the cursor to a setting line.

 Press the or key to set a desired value. The value is up or down by pressing the or
key.
 Press the ENTER key to enter the value.
 After completing the setting on the screen, press the END key to return to the upper screen.
To correct the entered numerical value, do the following.
 If it is before pressing the ENTER key, press the CANCEL key and enter the new
numerical value.
 If it is after pressing the ENTER key, move the cursor to the correcting line by pressing the
and keys and enter the new numerical value.
Note: If the CANCEL key is pressed after any entry is confirmed by pressing the ENTER key, all
the entries made so far on the screen concerned are canceled and screen returns to the upper
one.
 98 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
To complete the setting

Enter after making entries on each setting screen by pressing the ENTER key, the new settings
are not yet used for operation, though stored in the memory. To validate the new settings, take the
following steps.
 Press the END key to return to the upper screen. Repeat this until the confirmation screen
shown below is displayed. The confirmation screen is displayed just before returning to the
"Set. (change)" sub-menu.
C h a n g e s e t t i n g s ?
E N T E R = Y C A N C E L = N
 When the screen is displayed, press the ENTER key to start operation using the new
settings, or press the CANCEL key to correct or cancel entries. In the latter case, the screen
turns back to the setting screen to enable re-entries. Press the CANCEL key to cancel
entries made so far and to turn to the "Set. (change)" sub-menu.
4.2.6.2 Password
For the sake of security of setting changes, password protection can be set as follows:
 Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Setting change" screen.
 Select "Password" to display the "Password" screen.
 Enter a 4-digit number within the brackets after "Input" and press the ENTER key.
I n p u t  _ 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
 For confirmation, enter the same 4-digit number in the brackets after "Retype".
R e t y p e  _ 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
 Press the END key to display the confirmation screen. If the retyped number is different
from that first entered, the following message is displayed on the bottom of the "Password"
screen before returning to the upper screen.
"Unmatch passwd!"
Re-entry is then requested.
Password trap
After the password has been set, the password must be entered in order to enter the setting change
screens.
If "Set. (change)" is entered on the top "MENU" screen, the password trap screen "Password" is
displayed. If the password is not entered correctly, it is not possible to move to the "Setting
(change)" sub-menu screens.
P a s s w o r d  _ 
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 
Canceling or changing the password

To cancel the password protection, enter "0000" in the two brackets on the "Password" screen.
 99 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
The "Set. (change)" screen is then displayed without having to enter a password.
The password can be changed by entering a new 4-digit number on the "Password" screen in the
same way as the first password setting.
If you forget the password

Press CANCEL and RESET keys together for one second on the top "MENU" screen. The
screen goes off, and the password protection of the GRD110 is canceled. Set the password again.
4.2.6.3 Plant Name

To enter the plant name and other data, do the following. These data are attached to records.
 Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the " Set. (change)" screen.
 Select "Description" to display the "Description" screen.
/ 2 D e s c r i p t i o n
 P l a n t n a m e
 To enter the plant name, select "Plant name" on the "Description" screen.
 To enter special items, select "Description" on the "Description" screen.
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z 
a b c d e f g
h i j k l m n
o p q r s t u
v w x y z 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 
( )   @_ {
}  /    
 ! “ # $ %&
‘ : ; , . ˆ `
 Enter the text string.
4.2.6.4 Communication
If the relay is linked with RSM (relay setting and monitoring system) or IEC60870-5-103
communication, the relay address must be set. Do this as follows:
 Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
 Select "Comms" to display the "Comms" screen.
/ 2 C o m m s .
 A d d r . / P a r a m .
 S w i t c h
 Select "Addr./Param." on the "Comms" screen to enter the relay address number.
/ 3 A d d r . / P a r a m
 100 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
H D L C
1 _
I E C
2
I E C B 1 1
0
:
:
I E C B 4 4
0
I E C G T 1
1
I E C A T 1
1
I E C B T 1
1
I E C C T 1
1
I E C E 1 0
0
:
:
I E C E 8 0
0
I E C I 1 0
0
:
:
I E C I 8 0
0
 Enter the relay address number on "HDLC" line for RSM or "IEC" line for IEC60870-5-103
and press the ENTER key.
CAUTION Do not overlap the relay address number.
Settings for IEC60870-5-103 communication

The lines "IECB1" to "IECB4" are used for auxiliary inputs of IEC103 events INF27 to
INF30 in Appendix M. Assign signals to the columns "IECB1" to "IECB4" by entering the
number corresponding to each signal referring to Appendix B.
The lines "IECGT" to "IECCT" are used for fault indications of IEC103 events INF68 to
INF71 in Appendix M. Assign signals to the columns "IECGT" to "IECCT" by entering the
BO numbers (1 to 7) corresponding to the binary output settings.
The lines "IECE1" to "IECE8" are used to assign the signals for user customization. Assign
signals to the columns "IECE1" to "IECE8" by entering the number corresponding to each
signal referring to Appendix B.
Note: Assign "0" to the column when this function is not used.
The lines "IECI1" to "IECI8" are used to assign the above signals of "IECE1" to "IECE8" to
each INF number. Enter the INF number to the columns "IECI1" to "IECI8".
 Select "Switch" on the "Comms" screen to select the protocol and transmission speed (baud
rate), etc., of the RSM and IEC60870-5-103.
 101 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
/ 3 S w i t c h .
P r
o t o c o l 0 _
H D
L C / I E C
2 3
2 C 0
9 .
6 / 1 9 . 2 / 5 7 . 6
I E
C B R 1
9 .
6 / 1 9 . 2
I E
C B L K 0
N o
r m a l / B l o c k e d
I E
C N F I 0
1 .
2 / 2 . 4
I E
C G I 1 0
N o
/ Y e s
:
:
I E C G I 8 0
N o / Y e s
 Select the number and press the ENTER key.

<Protocol>
This setting is for changing the protocol (HDLC or IEC) of the channel 1 (COM1 port). In the
model with two channels (COM1 and COM2 ports), this setting for COM1 should be “HDLC”.
 When the remote RSM system applied, select 0(=HDLC). When the IEC60870-5-103
applied, select 1(=IEC103).
CAUTION When changing the setting to the HDLC during the IEC103 operation, the
IEC103 command INF18 in Appendix M is canceled.
The output of IEC103 command INF18 can be observed by assigning their
signal numbers to LEDs or binary output relays (see Sections 4.2.6.9 and
4.2.6.10).
<232C>
This line is to select the RS-232C baud rate when the RSM system applied.
Note: The default setting of the 232C is 9.6kbps. The 57.6kbps setting, if possible, is recommended to
serve user for comfortable operation. The setting of RSM100 is also set to the same baud rate.
<IECBR>
This line is to select the baud rate when the IEC60870-5-103 system applied.
<IECBLK>
Enter 1(=Blocked) to block the monitor direction in the IEC60870-5-103 communication.
<IECNFI >
This line is to select the normalized factor (1.2 or 2.4) of the current measurand.
<IECGI1 - 8 >
These lines are to use the GI (General Interrogation) or not for user customized signals. If use the
GI, enter 1(=Yes).
4.2.6.5 Setting the Recording

To set the recording function as described in Section 4.2.3, do the following:
 102 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 Select "Set. (change)" on the main "MENU" screen to display the "Set. (change)" screen.
 Select "Record" to display the "Record " screen.
/ 2 R e c o r d
 E . r e c o r d
 D . r e c o r d
 C o u n t e r
Setting the event recording

/ 3 E . r e c o r d
B I 1 c o m m . 3 _
N / O / R / B
B I 2 c o m m .
N / O / R / B
B I 8 c o m m .
N / O / R / B
 Enter 0(=None) or 1(=Operate) or 2(=Reset) or 3(=Both) for BI command trigger setting and
press the ENTER key.
Setting the disturbance recording

/ 3 D . r e c o r d
 T i m e / s t a r t e r
 S c h e m e s w
 B i n a r y s i g .
 Select "Time/starter" to display the "Time/starter" screen.

/ 4 T i m e / s t a r t e r
T i m e s
2 . 0 _
O C A
2 . 0 0
E F A
0 . 6 0
S E F A
0 . 2 0 0
N P S A
0 . 4 0
 Enter the recording time and starter element settings.
To set each starter to use or not to use, do the following:
 Select "Scheme sw" on the "D. record" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T R I P 1 _
 103 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
O f f / O n
B I 1
O f f / O n
O C 1
O f f / O n
E F 1
O f f / O n
S E F 1
O f f / O n
N P S 1
O f f / O n
 Enter 1 to use as a starter. If not to be used as a starter, enter 0.

To set each signal number to record binary signals, do the following:
 Select "Binary sig." on the "D. record" screen to display the "Binary sig." screen.
/ 4 B i n a r y s i g .
S I G 1
1 0 1 _
S I G 2
1 0 2
S I G 3 2
1 3 3
 Enter the signal number to record binary signals in Appendix B.
Setting the counter

/ 3 C o u n t e r
 S c h e m e s w
 A l a r m s e t
To set each counter to use or not to use, do the following:
 Select "Scheme sw" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 4 S c h e m e s w
T C S P E N 0 _
O f f / O n / O P T - O n
C B S M E N 0
O f f / O n
T C A E N 0
O f f / O n
 I y A E N 0
O f f / O n
O P T A E N 0
O f f / O n
 Enter 1 to use as a counter. If not to be used as a counter, enter 0.
To set threshold setting, do the following:
 Select "Alarm set" on the "Counter" screen to display the "Alarm set" screen.
/ 4 A l a r m s e t
 104 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
T C A L M
1 0 0 0 0 _
 I y A L M E 6
1 0 0 0 0
Y V A L U E
2 . 0
O P T A L M m s
1 0 0 0
 Enter the threshold settings.
4.2.6.6 Status
To set the status display described in Section 4.2.4, do the following:
Select "Status" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Status" screen.
/ 2 S t a t u s
 M e t e r i n g
 T i m e s y n c .
Setting the metering

 Select "Metering" to display the "Metering" screen.
/ 3 M e t e r i n g
D i s p l a y 1 _
P r i / S e c / P r i - A
 Enter 0 or 1 or 2 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=Pri) to display the primary side current in kilo-amperes(kA).
Enter 1(=Sec) to display the secondary side current.
Enter 2(=Pri-A) to display the primary side current in amperes(A).
Setting the time synchronisation

The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the binary input signal, RSM clock,
or by an IEC60870-5-103. This is selected by setting as follows.
 Select "Time sync." to display the "Time sync" screen.
/ 3 T i m e s y n c .
T i m e s y n c . 0 _
O f f / B I / R S M / I E C
 Enter 0, 1, 2 or 3 and press the ENTER key.

Enter 0(=off) not to be synchronised with any external signals.
Enter 1(=BI) to be synchronised with the binary input signal.
Enter 2(=RSM) to be synchronised with the RSM clock.
Enter 3(=IEC) to be synchronised with IEC60870-5-103.
Note: When selecting BI, RSM or IEC, check that they are active on the "Status" screen in "Status"
sub-menu.
 105 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
If BI is selected, the BI command trigger setting should be “None” because event records will
become full soon. (See Section 4.2.6.5.)
If it is set to an inactive BI, RSM or IEC, the calendar clock runs locally.
4.2.6.7 Protection
The GRD110 can have 4 setting groups for protection in order to accommodate changes in the
operation of the power system, one setting group is assigned active. To set the protection, do the
following:
 Select "Protection" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Protection" screen.
/ 2 P r o t e c t i o n
 C h a n g e a c t . g p .
 C h a n g e s e t .
 C o p y g p .
Changing the active group

 Select "Change act. gp." to display the "Change act. gp." screen.
/ 3 C h a n g e a c t .
g p .
A c t i v e g p . 1 _
 Enter the group number and press the ENTER key.
Changing the settings

Almost all the setting items have default values that are set when the product is shipped. For the
default values, see Appendix D and H. To change the settings, do the following:
 Select "Change set." to display the "Act gp.= *" screen.
/ 3 A c t g p . = 
 C o m m o n
 G r o u p 1
 G r o u p 2
 G r o u p 3
 G r o u p 4
Setting the common

To set the application setting, do the following.
 Select "APPL" on the "Protection" screen to display the "APPL" screen.
/ 4 C o m m o n
A P P L 0 _
3 P / 2 P / 1 P 3 phase / 2 phase / 1 pole
A O L E D 1
O f f / O n
APPL
To set the APPL setting
 Enter 0(=3P, three phase) or 1(=2P, two phase) or 2(=1P, single pole) and press the ENTER
key.
 106 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
AOLED
This switch is used to control the “TRIP” LED lighting when an alarm element outputs.
 Enter 1 (=On) to light the “TRIP” LED when an alarm element outputs, and press the
ENTER key. If not, enter 0 (=Off) and press the ENTER key.
Setting the group

 Select the group to change the settings and press the ENTER key.
/ 4 G r o u p 
 P a r a m e t e r
 T r i p
 A R C
Setting the parameter

Enter the line name and the CT ratio as follows:
 Select "Parameter" on the "Group " screen to display the "Parameter" screen.
/ 5 P a r a m e t e r
 L i n e n a m e
 C T r a t i o
 Select "Line name" to display the "Line name" screen.
 Enter the line name as a text string and press the END key.
 Select "CT ratio" to display the "CT ratio" screen.
/ 6 C T r a t i o
O C C T
4 0 0 _
E F C T
4 0 0
O C E F C T
4 0 0
S E F C T
4 0 0
Note: The "CT ratio" screen depends on the APPL setting.
 Enter the CT ratio and press the ENTER key.
Setting the trip function

To set the scheme switches and protection elements, do the following.
 Select "Trip" on the "Group " screen to display the "Trip" screen.
/ 5 T r i p
 S c h e m e s w
 P r o t . e l e m e n t
Setting the scheme switch

 Select "Scheme sw" to display the "Scheme sw" screen.
/ 6 S c h e m e s w
 A p p l i c a t i o n
 107 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 P F p r o t .
 E F p r o t .
 S E F p r o t .
 M i s c . p r o t .
Setting the application

To set the application setting, do the following.
 Select "Application" on the " Scheme sw" screen to display the "Application" screen.
/ 7 A p p l i c a t i o n
M O C 1 1
D T / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
M E F 1 1
D T / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
M S E 1 1
D T / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
M O C 2 1
D T / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
M E F 2 1
D T / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
M S E 2 1
D T / I E C / I E E E / U S / C
S V C N T 0
A L M & B L K / A L M
MOC1, MEF1, MSE1, MOC2, MEF2, MSE2

To set the OC1, EF1, SE1, OC2, EF2 and SE2 time delay characteristic type, do the following.
 Enter 0(=DT) or 1(=IEC) or 2(=IEEE), 3(=US) or 4(=C, Configurable) and press the
ENTER key.
SVCNT
Set the alarming and tripping block, or only alarming when a failure is detected by the automatic
supervision.
 Enter 0(=ALM&BLK, alarming and tripping block) or 1(=ALM, only alarming) and press the
ENTER key.
Setting the PF protection

 Select "PF prot." to display the "PF prot." screen.
/ 7 P F p r o t .
O C 1 E N 1 _
O f f / O n
M O C 1 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 1(=IEC).
N I / V I / E I / L T I
M O C 1 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 2(=IEEE).
M I / V I / E I
M O C 1 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 3(=US).
C O 2 / C O 8
O C 1 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC1] is 2(=IEEE),
D E F / D E P 3(=US) or 4(=C).
 108 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
O C 1 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
O C 2 E N 0
O f f / O n
M O C 2 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 1(=IEC).
N I / V I / E I / L T I
M O C 2 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 2(=IEEE).
M I / V I / E I
M O C 2 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 3(=US).
C O 2 / C O 8
O C 2 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MOC2] is 2(=IEEE),
D E F / D E P 3(=US) or 4(=C).
O C 2 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
O C 3 E N 0
O f f / O n
O C 3 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
O C 4 E N 0
O f f / O n
O C 4 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
U C 1 E N 0
O f f / O n
U C 2 E N 0
O f f / O n
OC1EN, OC2EN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the OC1 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OC1, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key. The OC2 is the same.
MOC1C, MOC2C
To set the Inverse Curve Type, do the following.
 If [MOC1C] or [MOC2C] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press
the ENTER key.
 If [MOC1C] or [MOC2C] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the
ENTER key.
 If [MOC1C] or [MOC2C] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
OC1R, OC2R
To set the Reset Characteristic, do the following.
 If [MOC1C] or [MOC2C] is 2(=IEEE), 3(=US) or 4(=C), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and
OC3EN, OC4EN, UC1EN, UC2EN

 Enter 1(=On) to enable the OC3 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the OC3, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key. The OC4, UC1 and UC2 are the same.
OC1-2F, OC2-2F, OC3-2F, OC4-2F

 Enter 1(=Block) to block the OC1, OC2, OC3 and OC4 against the inrush current, and press
 109 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
the ENTER key.

 After setting, press the END key to display the following confirmation screen.
 Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "Scheme sw" screen.
Setting the EF protection

 Select "EF prot." to display the "EF prot." screen.
/ 7 E F p r o t .
E F 1 E N 1 _
O f f / O n
M E F 1 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 1(=IEC).
N I / V I / E I / L T I
M E F 1 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 2(=IEEE).
M I / V I / E I
M E F 1 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 3(=US).
C O 2 / C O 8
E F 1 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF1] is 2(=IEEE),
D E F / D E P 3(=US) or 4(=C).
E F 1 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
E F 2 E N 0
O f f / O n
M E F 2 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 1(=IEC).
N I / V I / E I / L T I
M E F 2 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 2(=IEEE).
M I / V I / E I
M E F 2 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 3(=US).
C O 2 / C O 8
E F 2 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MEF2] is 2(=IEEE),
D E F / D E P 3(=US) or 4(=C).
E F 2 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
E F 3 E N 0
O f f / O n
E F 3 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
E F 4 E N 0
O f f / O n
E F 4 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
EF1EN, EF2EN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the EF1 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the EF1, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key. The EF2 is the same.
MEF1C, MEF2C
 If [MEF1C] or [MEF2C] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press
 110 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
the ENTER key.

 If [MEF1C] or [MEF2C] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the
ENTER key.
 If [MEF1C] or [MEF2C] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
EF1R, EF2R
 If [MEF1C] or [MEF2C] is 2(=IEEE), 3(=US) or 4(=C), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press
the ENTER key.
EF3EN, EF4EN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the EF3 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the EF3, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key. The EF4 is the same.
EF1-2F, EF2-2F, EF3-2F, EF4-2F

 Enter 1(=Block) to block the EF1, EF2, EF3 and EF4 against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
Setting the SEF protection

 Select "SEF prot." to display the "SEF prot." screen.
/ 7 S E F p r o t .
S E 1 E N 1 _
O f f / O n
M S E 1 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 1(=IEC).
N I / V I / E I / L T I
M S E 1 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 2(=IEEE).
M I / V I / E I
M S E 1 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 3(=US).
C O 2 / C O 8
S E 1 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE1] is 2(=IEEE),
D E F / D E P 3(=US) or 4(=C).
S E 1 S 2 0
O f f / O n
S E 1 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
S E 2 E N 0
O f f / O n
M S E 2 C - I E C 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 1(=IEC).
N I / V I / E I / L T I
M S E 2 C - I E E E 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE).
M I / V I / E I
M S E 2 C - U S 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 3(=US).
 111 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
C O 2 / C O 8
S E 2 R 0 This setting is displayed if [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE),
D E F / D E P 3(=US) or 4(=C).
S E 2 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
S E 3 E N 0
O f f / O n
S E 3 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
S E 4 E N 0
O f f / O n
S E 4 - 2 F 0
N A / B l o c k
SE1EN, SE2EN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the SEF1 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SEF1, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key. The SEF2 is the same.
MSE1C, MSE2C
 If [MSE1] or [MSE2] is 1(=IEC), enter 0(=NI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) or 3(=LTI) and press the
ENTER key.
 If [MSE1] or [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE), enter 0(=MI) or 1(=VI) or 2(=EI) and press the ENTER
key.
 If [MSE1] or [MSE2] is 3(=US), enter 0(=CO2) or 1(=CO8) and press the ENTER key.
SE1R, SE2R
 If [MSE1] or [MSE2] is 2(=IEEE) or 3(=US), enter 0(=DEF) or 1(=DEP) and press the
ENTER key.
SE1S2
To set the Stage 2 Timer Enable, do the following.
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the SE1S2 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SE1S2, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
SE3EN, SE4EN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the SEF3 and press the ENTER key. If disabling the SEF3, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key. The SEF4 is the same.
SE1-2F, SE2-2F, SE3-2F, SE4-2F

 Enter 1(=Block) to block the SEF1, SEF2, SEF3 and SEF4 against the inrush current, and
 112 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Setting the Misc. protection

The settings for miscellaneous protection are as follows:
 Select "Misc. prot." to display the "Misc. prot." screen.
/ 7 M i s c . p r o t .
T H M E N 0 _
O f f / O n
T H M A E N 0
O f f / O n
N P S 1 E N 0
O f f / O n
N P S 1 - 2 F 0 _
O f f / O n
N P S 2 E N 0
O f f / O n
N P S 2 - 2 F 0 _
O f f / O n
B C D E N 0
O f f / O n
B C D - 2 F 0 _
O f f / O n
B T C 0
O f f / O n
R T C 0
O f f / D I R / O C
C L S G 0
O f f / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4
C L D O EN 0
O f f / O n
THMEN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal OL and press the ENTER key. If disabling the Thermal
OL, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
THMAEN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the Thermal Alarm and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Thermal Alarm, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
NPS1EN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the NPS1EN and press the ENTER key. If disabling the NPS1EN,
enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
NPS2EN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the NPS2EN and press the ENTER key. If disabling the NPS2EN,
 113 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
BCDEN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the Broken Conductor and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Broken Conductor, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
BTC
 Enter 1(=On) to set the Back-trip control and press the ENTER key. If not setting the
Back-trip control, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
RTC
To set the Re-trip control, do the following.
 Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=Direct) or 2(=OC controlled) and press the ENTER key.
CLSG
To set the Cold Load settings group, do the following.
 Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=1) or 2(=2) or 3(=3) or 4(=4) and press the ENTER key.
CLDOEN
 Enter 1(=On) to enable the Cold Load drop-off and press the ENTER key. If disabling the
Cold Load drop-off, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
NPS1-2F, NPS2-2F, BCD-2F

 Enter 1(=Block) to block the NPS1, NPS2 and BCD against the inrush current, and press the
ENTER key.
Setting the protection elements

 Select "Prot. element" on the "Trip" screen to display the "Prot. element" screen.
/ 6 P r o t . e l e m e n t
 P F p r o t .
 E F p r o t .
 S E F p r o t .
 M i s c . p r o t .
Setting the PF protection

 Select "PF prot." to display the "PF prot." screen.
/ 7 P F p r o t .
O C 1 A
 114 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
1 . 0 0 _
T O C 1 OC1 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MOC1] =
1 . 0 0 0 1, 2, 3 or 4.
T O C 1 s OC1 Definite time setting. Display if [MOC1]= 0.
1 . 0 0
T O C 1 R s OC1 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MOC1] =
0 . 0 1 or [OC1R] = 0.
T O C 1 R M OC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display
1 . 0 0 0 if [OC1R] = 1.
O C 2 A
5 . 0 0
T O C 2 OC2 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MOC2] =
1 . 0 0 0 1, 2, 3 or 4.
T O C 2 s OC2 Definite time setting. Display if [MOC2]= 0.
0 . 0 0
T O C 2 R s OC2 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MOC2] =
0 . 0 1 or [OC1R] = 0.
T O C 2 R M OC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier. Display
1 . 0 0 0 if [OC2R] = 1.
O C 3 A
1 0 . 0 0
T O C 3 s
0 . 0 0
O C 4 A
2 0 . 0 0
T O C 4 s
0 . 0 0
O C 1 - k IDMT curve setting of OC1
0 . 0 0
O C 1 -  IDMT curve setting of OC1
0 . 0 0
O C 1 - c IDMT curve setting of OC1
0 . 0 0 0
O C 1 - k r IDMT curve setting of OC1
0 . 0 0
O C 1 -  IDMT curve setting of OC1
0 . 0 0
O C 2 - k IDMT curve setting of OC2
0 . 0 0
O C 2 -  IDMT curve setting of OC2
0 . 0 0
O C 2 - c IDMT curve setting of OC2
0 . 0 0 0
O C 2 - k r IDMT curve setting of OC2
0 . 0 0
O C 2 -  IDMT curve setting of OC2
0 . 0 0
U C 1 A
0 . 2 0
T U C 1 s
0 . 0 0
U C 2 A
0 . 4 0
T U C 2 s
0 . 0 0
 Enter the numerical value and press the ENTER key.
 115 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the " Prot. element" screen.
Note: Default current settings are shown for a 1A rated relay. They must be multiplied by 5 in the case
of a 5A rated version.
Setting the EF protection

 Select "EF prot." to display the "EF prot." screen.
/ 7 E F p r o t .
E F 1 A
0 . 3 0 _
T E F 1 EF1 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MEF1] =
1 . 0 0 0 1, 2, 3 or 4.
T E F 1 s EF1 Definite time setting. Display if [MEF1] =0.
1 . 0 0
T E F 1 R s EF1 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MEF1]
0 . 0 = 1 or [EF1R] = 0.
T E F 1 R M EF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier.
1 . 0 0 0 Display if [EF1R] = 1.
E F 2 A
3 . 0 0
T E F 2 EF2 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MEF2] =
1 . 0 0 0 1, 2, 3 or 4.
T E F 2 s EF2 Definite time setting. Display if [MEF2] =0.
1 . 0 0
T E F 2 R s EF2 Definite time reset delay. Display if [MEF2]
0 . 0 = 1 or [EF1R] = 0.
T E F 2 R M EF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier.
1 . 0 0 0 Display if [EF2R] = 1.
E F 3 A
5 . 0 0
T E F 3 s
0 . 0 0
E F 4 A
1 0 . 0 0
T E F 4 s
0 . 0 0
E F 1 - k IDMT curve setting of EF1
0 . 0 0
E F 1 -  IDMT curve setting of EF1
0 . 0 0
E F 1 - c IDMT curve setting of EF1
0 . 0 0 0
E F 1 - k r IDMT curve setting of EF1
0 . 0 0
E F 1 -  IDMT curve setting of EF1
0 . 0 0
E F 2 - k IDMT curve setting of EF2
0 . 0 0
E F 2 -  IDMT curve setting of EF2
0 . 0 0
 116 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
E F 2 - c IDMT curve setting of EF2

0 . 0 0 0
E F 2 - k r IDMT curve setting of EF2
0 . 0 0
E F 2 -  IDMT curve setting of EF2
0 . 0 0
Setting the SEF protection

 Select "SEF prot." to display the "SEF prot." screen.
/ 7 S E F p r o t .
S E 1 A
0 . 1 0 0 _
T S E 1 SEF1 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MSE1]
1 . 0 0 0 = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
T S E 1 s SEF1 Definite time setting. Display if [MSE1] =
1 . 0 0 0.
T S E 1 R s SEF1 Definite time reset delay. Display if
0 . 0 [MSE1] = 1 or [SE1R] = 0.
T S E 1 R M SEF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier.
1 . 0 0 0 Display if [SE1R] = 1.
T S E 1 S 2 s SEF1 Stage 2 Definite time setting.
0 . 0 0
S E 2 A
0 . 5 0 0
T S E 2 SEF2 Time multiplier setting. Display if [MSE2]
1 . 0 0 0 = 1, 2, 3 or 4.
T S E 2 s SEF2 Definite time setting. Display if [MSE2] =
0 . 0 0 0.
T S E 2 R s SEF2 Definite time reset delay. Display if
0 . 0 [MSE2] = 1 or [SE2R] = 0.
T S E 2 R M SEF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier.
1 . 0 0 0 Display if [SE2R] = 1.
S E 3 A
0 . 5 0 0
T S E 3 s
0 . 0 0
S E 4 A
0 . 50 0
T S E 4 s
0 . 0 0
S E 1 - k IDMT curve setting of SE1
0 . 0 0
S E 1 -  IDMT curve setting of SE1
0 . 0 0
S E 1 - c IDMT curve setting of SE1
0 . 0 0 0
 117 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
S E 1 - k r IDMT curve setting of SE1

0 . 0 0
S E 1 -  IDMT curve setting of SE1
0 . 0 0
S E 2 - k IDMT curve setting of SE2
0 . 0 0
S E 2 -  IDMT curve setting of SE2
0 . 0 0
S E 2 - c IDMT curve setting of SE2
0 . 0 0 0
S E 2 - k r IDMT curve setting of SE2
0 . 0 0
S E 2 -  IDMT curve setting of SE2
0 . 0 0
Setting the Misc. protection

 Select "Misc. prot." to display the "Misc. prot." screen.
/ 7 M i s c . p r o t .
T H M A
1 . 0 0 _
T H M I P A
0 . 0 0
T T H M m i n
1 0 . 0
T H M A %
8 0
N P S 1 A
0 . 4 0
T N P S 1 s
0 . 0 0
N P S 2 A
0 . 2 0
T N P S 2 s
0 . 0 0
B C D
0 . 2 0
T B C D s
0 . 0 0
C B F A
0 . 5 0
T B T C s
0 . 5 0
T R T C s
1 . 0 0
I C D - 2 f %
1 5
 118 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
I C D O C s
0 . 1 0
T C L E s
1 0 0
T C L R s
1 0 0
I C L D O A
0 . 5 0
T C L D O s
0 . 0 0
Setting Autoreclose function

To set the autoreclose function, do the following:
 Select "ARC" on the "Group " screen to display the "ARC" screen.
/ 5 A R C
 S c h e m e s w
 T i m e r s
Setting the scheme switch

 Select "Scheme switch" to display the following screen.
/ 6 A R C
 G e n e r a l
 O C
 E F
 S E F
 E X T
General
 Select "General" to display the "General" screen.
/ 7 G e n e r a l
A R C E N 0 _
O f f / O n
A R C - N U M 0 _
S 1 / S 2 / S 3 / S 4 / S 5
A R C R E Q 0
O f f / O n
A R C F A I L 0
O f f / O n
C O O R D - O C 0 _
O f f / O n
C O O R D - E F 0 _
O f f / O n
 119 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
C O O R D - S E 0 _
O f f / O n
 Enter 1(=On) on the "ARCEN" column to enable the autoreclose function and press the
ENTER key. If disabling the autoreclose function, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER
key.
 Enter 0(=S1), 1(=S2), 2(=S3), 3(=S4) or 4(=S5) on "ARC-NUM" column to set the number of
shot, and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 1(=On) on the "ARCREQ" column if the autoreclose requirement is set, and press the
ENTER key.
 Enter 1(=On) on the "ARCFAIL" column to output the autoreclose fail message and press the
ENTER key. If not required, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 1(=On) on the "COOD-OC", "COOD-EF" and "COOD-SE" columns to enable the
autoreclose coordination and press the ENTER key. If disabling the autoreclose
coordination, enter 0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "/6 ARC" screen.
OC, <EF>, <SEF>
 Select "OC" to display the "OC" screen.

/ 7 O C
O C 1 - I N I T 0 _
N A / O n / B l o c k
O C 1 - T P 1 0 _
O f f / I n s t / S e t
O C 1 - T P 2 0 _
O C 1 - T P 3 0 _
O C 1 - T P 4 0 _
O C 1 - T P 5 0 _
O C 1 - T P 6 0 _
O C 2 - I N I T 0 _
O C 2 - T P 1 0 _
O C 2 - T P 2 0 _
O C 2 - T P 3 0 _
O C 2 - T P 4 0 _
 120 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
O C 2 - T P 5 0 _
O C 2 - T P 6 0 _
O C 3 - I N I T 0 _
O C 3 - T P 1 0 _
O C 3 - T P 2 0 _
O C 3 - T P 3 0 _
O C 3 - T P 4 0 _
O C 3 - T P 5 0 _
O C 3 - T P 6 0 _
O C 4 - I N I T 0 _
O C 4 - T P 1 0 _
O C 4 - T P 2 0 _
O C 4 - T P 3 0 _
O C 4 - T P 4 0 _
O C 4 - T P 5 0 _
O C 4 - T P 6 0 _
 Enter 1(=INIT) or 2(=Block) to initiate or to block the autoreclose by the OC1 trip in
"OC1-INIT". To neither initiate nor block it, enter 0(=NA).
 Enter 1(=Inst) or 2(=Set) to set the OC1 first trip to “Instantaneous trip” or “Set time delay
trip” in the "OC1-TP1". To not use the OC1 trip, enter 0(=Off).
Note: OC1-TP2 to OC1-TP6 show the OC1 second trip to OC1 sixth trip.
For OC2 to OC4, the settings are same as OC1. After changing settings, press the ENTER key.
The setting method for EF and SEF is same as that of OC above.
EXT>
 Select "EXT" on the "Scheme sw" screen to set the external initiation of the autoreclose.
/ 7 E X T
E X T - I N I T 0 _
 Enter 1(=INIT) or 2(=Block) to initiate or to block the autoreclose by the external trip. To
neither initiate nor block it, enter 0(=NA).
 121 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Setting the timers
 Select "Timers" on the "Group " screen to set timer setting and the threshold setting of OC,
EF and SEF for co-ordination.
/ 6 T i m e r s
T R D Y s
6 0 . 0 _
T D 1 s
1 0 . 0 0 _
T R 1 s
3 1 0 . 0 0 _
T D 2 s
1 0 . 0 0 _
T R 2 s
3 1 0 . 0 0 _
T D 3 s
1 0 . 0 0 _
T R 3 s
3 1 0 . 0 0 _
T D 4 s
1 0 . 0 0 _
T R 4 s
3 1 0 . 0 0 _
T D 5 s
1 0 . 0 0 _
T R 5 s
3 1 0 . 0 0 _
T W s
2 . 0 0 _
T S U C s
3 . 0 0 _
T F A I L s
3 . 0 0 _
T R C O V s
1 0 . 0 0 _
T A R C P s
1 0 . 0 0 _
T R S E T s
3 . 0 0 _
O C A
1 . 0 0 _
E F A
0 . 3 0 _
S E A
0 . 0 1 0 _
 Press the ENTER (=Y) key to change settings and return to the "ARC" screen.
 122 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Setting APPL
To set the current input state and set the operating time setting, do the following:
 Select "APPL" on the "Protection" screen to display the "APPL" screen.
/ 3 A P P L
A P P L 0 _
3 P / 2 P / 1 P
O p t i m e 0
N o r m a l / F a s t
 Enter 0(=3P : 3 phase), 1(=2P : 2 phase) or 2(=1P : 1 pole) to set the current input state and
 Enter 0(=Normal : Definite time or Inverse time), 1(=Fast : High speed operation) to set the
operating time and press the ENTER key.
Note: If “Fast” selected, all OC and EF elements operate at high-speed ( approximately 20ms).
Setting group copy

To copy the settings of one group and overwrite them to another group, do the following:
 Select "Copy gp." on the "Protection" screen to display the "Copy A to B" screen.
/ 3 C o p y A t o B
A _
B
 Enter the group number to be copied in line A and press the ENTER key.
 Enter the group number to be overwritten by the copy in line B and press the ENTER key.
4.2.6.8 Binary Input

The logic level of binary input signals can be inverted by setting before entering the scheme
logic. Inversion is used when the input contact cannot meet the requirements described in Table
3.2.2.
 Select "Binary I/P" on the "Set. (change)" sub-menu to display the "Binary I/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y I / P
. B I 1
. B I 2
. B I 3
. B I 4
. B I 5
. B I 6
. B I 7
. B I 8
. A l a r m 1 T e x t
Selection of Binary Input

 Select the input number (BI number) on the "Binary I/P" screen.
 123 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Setting Alarm  Text

If the BI selected is used for an alarm, alarm message can be set.
 Select the Alarm text and press the ENTER key to display the text input screen.
_
A B C D E F G
H I J K L M N
O P Q R S T U
V W X Y Z 
a b c d e f g
h i j k l m n
o p q r s t u
v w x y z 
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 
( )   @_ {
}  /    
 ! “ # $ %&
‘ : ; , . ˆ `
 Enter the characters (up to 16 characters) according to the text setting method.
After setting, press the ENTER key to display the "BI" screen.
/ 3 B I 
 T i m e r s
 F u n c t i o n s
Setting timers
 Select "Timers" on the "BI" screen to display the "Timers" screen.
/ 4 T i m e r s
B I 1 P U D s Pick-up delay setting

0 . 0 0 _
B I 1 D O D s Drop-off delay setting
0 . 0 0
 After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
Setting Functions
 Select "Functions" on the "BI" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
/ 4 F u n c t i o n s
B I 1 S N S 1 _
N o r m / I n v
B I 1 S G S 0
O f f / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4
O C 1 B L K 0
O f f / O n
O C 2 B L K 0
 124 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
O f f / O n
O C 3 B L K 0
O f f / O n
O C 4 B L K 0
O f f / O n
E F 1 B L K 0
O f f / O n
E F 2 B L K 0
O f f / O n
E F 3 B L K 0
O f f / O n
E F 4 B L K 0
O f f / O n
S E 1 B L K 0
O f f / O n
S E 2 B L K 0
O f f / O n
S E 3 B L K 0
O f f / O n
S E 4 B L K 0
O f f / O n
U C B L K 0
O f f / O n
T H M B L K 0
O f f / O n
N P S B L K 0
O f f / O n
B C D B L K 0
O f f / O n
T C F A L M 0
O f f / O n
C B O P N 0
O f f / O n
C B C L S 0
O f f / O n
E X T 3 P H 0
O f f / O n
E X T A P H 0
O f f / O n
E X T B P H 0
O f f / O n
E X T C P H 0
O f f / O n
R M T R S T 0
O f f / O n
S Y N C L K 0
O f f / O n
S T O R C D 0
O f f / O n
A l a r m 1 0
O f f / O n
A l a r m 2 0
O f f / O n
 125 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
A l a r m 3 0
O f f / O n
A l a r m 4 0
O f f / O n
A R C B L K 0 _
O f f / O n
A R C R D Y 0 _
O f f / O n
A R C I N I T 0 _
O f f / O n
M N L C L S 0 _
O f f / O n
A R C N A 0 _
O f f / O n
A R C R E Q 0 _
O f f / O n
BI1SNS
To set the Binary Input 1 Sense, do the following.
 Enter 0(=Normal) or 1(=Inverted) and press the ENTER key.
BI1SGS
To set the Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select, do the following.
 Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=1) or 2(=2) or 3(=3) or 4(=4) and press the ENTER key.
Others
 Enter 1(=On) to set the function and press the ENTER key. If not setting the function, enter
0(=Off) and press the ENTER key.
 After setting, press the END key to return to the "BI" screen.
4.2.6.9 Binary Output

All the binary outputs of the GRD110 except the relay failure signal are user-configurable. It is
possible to assign one signal or up to four ANDing or ORing signals to one output relay.
Available signals are listed in Appendix B.
It is also possible to attach Instantaneous or delayed or latched reset timing to these signals.
Appendix D shows the factory default settings.
CAUTION
When having changed the binary output settings, release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
To configure the binary output signals, do the following:
Selection of output relay

 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
 126 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 B O 1
 B O 2
 B O 3
 B O 4
 B O 5
 B O 6
 B O 7
Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter
0 to logic gates #1 to #4 in assigning signals.
 Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the
"BO" screen.
/ 3 B O 
 L o g i c / R e s e t
Setting the logic gate type and timer

 Select "Logic/Reset" to display the "Logic/Reset" screen.
/ 4 L o g i c / R e s e t
L o g i c 0 _
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s t / D l / D W/ L a t c h
 Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Delayed) or 2(=Dwell) or 3(=Latched) to select the reset
timing and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "BO" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds on a digest screen.
Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
I n # 1
2 1 _
I n # 2
1 1
I n # 3
2 4
I n # 4
0
T B O s
0 . 2 0
 Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix B. Do not assign the signal numbers 170 to 176 (signal names: "BO1
OP" to "BO7 OP"). And set the delay time of timer TBO.
 127 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).
Repeat this process for the outputs to be configured.
4.2.6.10 LEDs
Three LEDs of the GRD110 are user-configurable. A configurable LED can be programmed to
indicate the OR combination of a maximum of 4 elements, the individual statuses of which can
be viewed on the LED screen as “Virtual LEDs.” The signals listed in Appendix B can be
assigned to each LED as follows.
CAUTION
When having changed the LED settings, must release the latch state on a digest screen by
pressing the RESET key for more than 3 seconds.
Selection of LEDs
 Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "LED" screen.
/ 2 L E D
 L E D
 V i r t u a l L E D
Selection of real LEDs

 Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/ 3 L E D
 L E D 1
 L E D 2
 L E D 3
Note: The setting is required for all the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates
#1 to #4 in assigning signals.
 Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED" screen.
/ 4 L E D 
Setting the logic gate type and timer

L o g i c 0 _
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h
 Enter 0(=OR) or 1(=AND) to use an OR gate or AND gate and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "LED" screen.
 128 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
I n # 1
2 1 _
I n # 2
1 1
I n # 3
2 4
I n # 4
0
 Assign signals to gates (In #1 to #4) by entering the number corresponding to each signal
referring to Appendix B.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the gates #1 to #4, enter 0 for the unassigned gate(s).

Selection of virtual LEDs

 Select "Virtual LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "Virtual LED" screen.
/ 3 V i r t u a l L E D
 I N D 1
 I N D 2
 Select the IND number and press the ENTER key to display the "IND" screen.
/ 4 I N D 
 R e s e t
Setting the reset timing

 Select "Reset" to display the "Reset" screen.
/ 5 R e s e t
R e s e t 0 _
I n s t / L a t c h
 Enter 0(=Instantaneous) or 1(=Latched) to select the reset timing and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.

Note: To release the latch state, push the [RESET] key for more than 3 seconds.
Assigning signals
 Select "Functions" on the "IND" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
 129 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
B I T 1
5 1 _
B I T 2
5 4
B I T 8
7 8
 Assign signals to bits (1 to 8) by entering the number corresponding to each signal referring to
Appendix B.
Note: If signals are not assigned to all the bits 1 to 8, enter 0 for the unassigned bit(s).
 Press the END key to return to the "IND" screen.

4.2.7 Testing
The sub-menu "Test" provides such functions as disabling the automatic monitoring function and
forced operation of binary outputs.
Note: When operating the "Test" menu, the "IN SERVICE" LED is flickering. But if an alarm occurs
during the test, the flickering stops. The "IN SERVICE" LED flickers only in a lighting state.
4.2.7.1 Scheme Switch

The automatic monitor function (A.M.F.) can be disabled by setting the switch [A.M.F] to
"OFF".
Disabling the A.M.F. inhibits trip blocking even in the event of a failure in the items being
monitored by this function. It also prevents failures from being displayed on the "ALARM" LED
and LCD described in Section 4.2.1. No events related to A.M.F. are recorded, either.
Disabling A.M.F. is useful for blocking the output of unnecessary alarms during testing.
 Select "Test" on the top "MENU" screen to display the "Test" screen.
/ 1 T e s t
 S w i t c h
 Select "Switch" to display the "Switch" screen.

/ 2 S w i t c h
A . M . F . 1 _
O f f / O n
C L P T S T 1
O f f / S 0 / S 3
T H M R S T 0
O f f / O n
S H O T N U M 0 _
O f f / S 1 - S 6
I E C T S T 0
O f f / O n
 Enter 0 or 1 to disable the A.M.F. or not and press the ENTER key.
 130 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 Enter 0(=Off) or 1(=State0) or 2(=State3) to set forcibly the test condition of the Cold Load
Protection (CLPTST) and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0(=Off), 1=(S1:Once), 2(=S2:Twice), 3=(S3:Thrice), 4(=S4:Four times), 5=(S5:Five

times) or 6(=S6:Six times) to set the number of autoreclose and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 1(=On) to reset forcibly the thermal overload element for testing (THMRST) and press
the ENTER key.
 Enter 1(=On) for IECTST to transmit ‘test mode’ to the control system by IEC60870-5-103
communication when testing the local relay, and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "Test" screen.
4.2.7.2 Binary Output Relay

It is possible to forcibly operate all binary output relays for checking connections with the
external devices. Forced operation can be performed on one or more binary outputs at a time.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. Then the LCD
displays the name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
B O 1 0 _
D i s a b l e / E n a b l e
B O 2 0
B O 3 0
B O 4 0
B O 5 0
B O 6 0
B O 7 0
 Enter 1(=Enable) and press the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
 After completing the entries, press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown
below.
O p e r a t e ?
 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the assigned output relays.
 Release pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.

 Press the CANCEL key to return to the upper "Binary O/P" screen.
 131 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
4.3 Personal Computer Interface

The relay can be operated from a personal computer using an RS232C port on the front panel.
On the personal computer, the following analysis and display of the fault currents are available in
addition to the items available on the LCD screen.
 Display of current waveform: Oscillograph display
 Symmetrical component analysis: On arbitrary time span
 Harmonic analysis: On arbitrary time span
 Frequency analysis: On arbitrary time span
For the details, see the separate instruction manual "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
4.4 Relay Setting and Monitoring System

The Relay Setting and Monitoring (RSM) system is a system that retrieves and analyses the data
on power system quantities, fault and event records and views or changes settings in individual
relays via a telecommunication network using a remote PC.
Figure 4.4.1 shows the typical configuration of the RSM system via a protocol converter G1PR2.
The relays are connected through twisted pair cables, and the maximum 256 relays can be
connected since the G1PR2 can provide up to 8 ports. The total length of twisted pair wires
should not exceed 1200 m. Relays are mutually connected using an RS485 port on the relay rear
panel and connected to a PC RS232C port via G1PR2. Terminal resistor (150 ohms) is connected
the last relay. The transmission rate used is 64 kbits/s.
Twisted paired
cable
TO
IN
T
AL
V TO
IN
T
AL
V
TE TE
RE RE
SHI
SER
R
AR
I SHI
SER
R
AR
I
ST ST
SE SE
BA
AVIC
I
B0V EN
M EC
E BA
AVIC
I
M
B0V EN
EEC
IN IN
T T
E TE E TE
P NWA P NWA
G G
R R
DN DN
Figure 4.4.1 Relay Setting and Monitoring System
 132 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
4.5 IEC 60870-5-103 Interface

The GRD110 supports the IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol. This protocol is mainly
used when the relay communicates with a control system and is used to transfer the following
measurand and status data from the relay to the control system. (For details, see Appendix M.)
 Measurand data: current
 Status data: events, fault indications, etc.
The protocol can be used through the RS-485 port on the relay rear panel.
The relay supports two baud-rates 9.6kbps and 19.2kbps, and supports two normalizing factors
1.2 and 2.4 for measurand. These are selected by setting. See Section 4.2.6.4.
The data transfer from the relay can be blocked by the setting.
For the settings, see the Section 4.2.6.
4.6 Clock Function

The clock function (Calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:
 Event records
 Disturbance records
 Fault records
The calendar clock can run locally or be synchronised with the external clock such as the binary
time standard input signal, RSM clock or IEC60870-5-103. This can be selected by setting.
The “clock synchronise” function synchronises the relay internal clock to the binary input signal
by the following method. Since the BI signal is an “ON” or “OFF” signal which cannot express
year-month-day and hour-minute-second etc, synchronising is achieved by setting the number of
milliseconds to zero. This method will give accurate timing if the synchronising BI signal is input
every second.
Synchronisation is triggered by an “OFF” to “ON” (rising edge) transition of the BI signal. When
the trigger is detected, the millisecond value of the internal clock is checked, and if the value is
between 0~500ms then it is rounded down. If it is between 500~999ms then it is rounded up (ie
the number of seconds is incremented).
n sec (n+1) sec

500ms
corrected to (n+1) sec
corrected to n sec
t
When the relays are connected with the RSM system as shown in Figure 4.4.1 and selected
"RSM" in the time synchronisation setting, the calendar clock of each relay is synchronised with
the RSM clock. If the RSM clock is synchronised with the external time standard, then all the
relay clocks are synchronised with the external time standard.
 133 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
5. Installation
5.1 Receipt of Relays
When relays are received, carry out the acceptance inspection immediately. In particular, check
for damage during transportation, and if any is found, contact the vendor.
Always store the relays in a clean, dry environment.
5.2 Relay Mounting

A flush mounting relay is included. Appendix F shows the case outlines.
For details of relay withdrawal and insertion, see Section 6.7.3.
5.3 Electrostatic Discharge

CAUTION
Do not take out the relay unit outside the relay case since electronic components on the modules
are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If it is absolutely essential to take the modules out of
the case, do not touch the electronic components and terminals with your bare hands.
Additionally, always put the module in a conductive anti-static bag when storing it.
5.4 Handling Precautions

A person's normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several thousand
volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when handling electronic circuits
can cause serious damage. This damage often may not be immediately apparent, but the
reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits are completely safe from electrostatic discharge when housed in the case.
Do not expose them to risk of damage by withdrawing the relay unit unnecessarily.
The relay unit incorporates the highest practical protection for its semiconductor devices.
However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw the relay unit, precautions should be taken to
preserve the high reliability and long life for which the equipment has been designed and
manufactured.
CAUTION
 Before removing the relay unit, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
 Use the handle to draw out the relay unit. Avoid touching the electronic components,
printed circuit board or connectors.
 Do not pass the relay unit to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
 Place the relay unit on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the
same potential as yourself.
 Do not place the relay unit in polystyrene trays.
 134 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
It is strongly recommended that detailed investigations on electronic circuitry should be carried

out in a Special Handling Area such as described in the aforementioned IEC 60747.
5.5 External Connections

External connections for each relay model are shown in Appendix G.
 135 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
6. Commissioning and Maintenance

6.1 Outline of Commissioning Tests
The GRD110 is fully numerical and the hardware is continuously monitored.
Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include hardware tests and the
conjunctive tests. The function tests are at the user’s discretion.
In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC can be fully applied.
Test personnel must be familiar with general relay testing practices and safety precautions to
avoid personal injuries or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by monitoring which
circuits function when the DC power is supplied.
User interfaces
Binary input circuits and output circuits
AC input circuits
Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based.
Measuring elements
Metering and recording
Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other
external equipment.
The following tests are included:

On load test: phase sequence check and polarity check
Tripping circuit test
 136 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
6.2 Cautions
6.2.1 Safety Precautions
CAUTION
 The relay rack is provided with an earthing terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the relay rack is earthed.
 When connecting the cable to the back of the relay, firmly fix it to the terminal block and
attach the cover provided on top of it.
 Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
6.2.2 Cautions on Tests
CAUTION
 While the power is on, do not drawout/insert the relay unit.
 Before turning on the power, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
 Be careful that the relay is not damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
 If settings are changed for testing, remember to reset them to the original settings.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
 137 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
6.3 Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Single-phase current source
1 Three-phase current source
1 DC power supply
3 AC ammeter
1 Time counter, precision timer
1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or the
default settings.
For the default settings, see the following appendixes:

Appendix D Binary Output Default Setting List
Appendix H Relay Setting Sheet
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the relay conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC current and frequency ratings, and
auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the RS232C port on the front of the relay.
RSM100 software is required to run the PC.
For the details, see the separate volume "PC INTERFACE RSM100".
 138 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
6.4 Hardware Tests

The tests can be performed without external wiring, but a DC power supply and AC current
source is required.
6.4.1 User Interfaces
This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.
LCD display
 Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the LCD is off.
Note: If there is a failure, the LCD will display the "ERR: " screen when the DC voltage is applied.
 Press the RESET key for one second or more and check that black dots appear on the whole
screen.
LED display
 Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the "IN SERVICE" LED is lit in green.
 Press the RESET key for one second or more and check that remaining five LEDs are lit in
red or yellow. (Programmable LEDs are yellow.)
VIEW and RESET keys

 Press the VIEW key when the LCD is off and check that the "Virtual LED" and "Metering"
screens are sequentially displayed on the LCD.
 Press the RESET key and check that the LCD turns off.
Other operation keys

 Press any key when the LCD is off and check that the LCD displays the "MENU" screen.
Press the END key to turn off the LCD.
 Repeat this for all keys.
6.4.2 Binary Input Circuit
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.1.
 139 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
GRD110
TB2 - A1
BI1
- B1 BI2
BI3
BI4
BI5
BI6
- A8 BI7
BI8
- B8
DC  TB2 - A9
power
supply  - B9
Figure 6.4.1 Testing Binary Input Circuit
 Display the "Binary I/O" screen from the "Status" sub-menu.

/ 2 B i n a r y I / O
I P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
O P  0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 
 Apply the rated DC voltage to terminal A1-B1, A2-B2, ..., A8-B8 of terminal block TB2.
Check that the status display corresponding to the input signal (IP) changes from 0 to 1. (For
details of the binary input status display, see Section 4.2.4.2.)
The user will be able to perform this test for one terminal to another or for all the terminals at
once.
6.4.3 Binary Output Circuit

This test can be performed by using the "Test" sub-menu and forcibly operating the relay drivers
and output relays. Operation of the output contacts is monitored at the output terminal. The
output contact and corresponding terminal number are shown in Appendix G.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen. The LCD
displays the name of the output relay.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
B O 1 0 _
B O 2 0
B O 3 0
B O 4 0
B O 5 0
B O 6 0
B O 7 0
 140 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 Enter 1 and press the ENTER key.
 After completing the entries, press the END key. The LCD will display the screen shown
below. If 1 is entered for all the output relays, the following forcible operation can be
performed collectively.
O p e r a t e ?
 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relays forcibly.
 Check that the output contacts operate at the terminal.

 Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation
6.4.4 AC Input Circuits
This test can be performed by applying the checking currents to the AC input circuits and
verifying that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.
The testing circuit is shown in Figure 6.4.2. A single-phase current source is required.
GRD110
A TB1 -1 Ia
Single-phase -2
current
source -3 Ib
-4
-5
Ic
-6
-7
IN
-8
 TB2 -A9
DC
power
supply  -B9
Note: AC input terminal numbers depends on model.
Figure 6.4.2 Testing AC Input Circuit
To check the metering data on the "Metering" screen, do the followings.

"Set. (view)" sub-menu  "Status" screen  "Metering" screen
If the setting is 0(= Primary), change the setting to 1(=Secondary) in the "Set. (change)"
sub-menu.
"Set. (change)" sub-menu  "Status" screen  "Metering" screen
Remember to reset it to the initial setting after the test is finished.
 Open the "Metering" screen in the "Status" sub-menu.
"Status" sub-menu  "Metering" screen
 Apply AC currents and check that the displayed values are within 5% of the input values.
 141 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
6.5 Function Test

6.5.1 Measuring Element
Measuring element characteristics are realised by software, so it is possible to verify the overall
characteristics by checking representative points.
Operation of the element under test is observed by assigning the signal number to a configurable
LED or a binary output relay.
CAUTION
After testing, must reset settings for testing to the original settings.
In case of a three-phase element, it is sufficient to test for a representative phase. The A-phase
element is selected hereafter.
Assigning signal to LED

 Select "LED" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "2/ LED" screen.
/ 2 L E D
 L E D
 V i r t u a l L E D
 Select "LED" on the "/2 LED" screen to display the "/3 LED" screen.
/ 3 L E D
 L E D 1
 L E D 2
 L E D 3
Note: The setting is required for all the LEDs. If any of the LEDs are not used, enter 0 to logic gates
#1 to #4 in assigning signals.
 Select the LED number and press the ENTER key to display the "LED" screen.
/ 4 L E D 

L o g i c 0 _
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s t / L a t c h
 Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.
 Select "Functions" on the "LED" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
 142 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
I n # 1
2 1 _
I n # 2
1 1
I n # 3
2 4
I n # 4
0
 Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix
B, and assign other gates the “0”.
Assigning signal to Binary Output Relay

 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Set. (change)" screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O / P
 B O 1
 B O 2
 B O 3
 B O 4
 B O 5
 B O 6
 B O 7
Note: The setting is required for all the binary outputs. If any of the binary outputs are not used, enter
0 to logic gates In #1 to #4 in assigning signals.
 Select the output relay number (BO number) and press the ENTER key to display the
"BO" screen.
/ 3 B O 

L o g i c 0 _
O R / A N D
R e s e t 0
I n s t / D l / D W/ L a t c h
 Enter 0 (= OR) and press the ENTER key.
 Enter 0 (= Instantaneous) and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key to return to the "BO" screen.
 Select "Functions" on the "BO" screen to display the "Functions" screen.
 143 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
I n # 1
2 1 _
I n # 2
1 1
I n # 3
2 4
I n # 4
0
T B O s
0 . 2 0
 Assign the gate In #1 the number corresponding to the testing element referring to Appendix
B, and assign other gates the “0”.
 144 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
6.5.1.1 Overcurrent and undercurrent element OC1 to OC4, UC1, UC2 and CBF
The overcurrent element is checked on the operating current value and operating time for IDMT
curve.
Operating current check

Figure 6.5.1 shows a testing circuit. The operating current value is checked by increasing or
decreasing the magnitude of the current applied.
GRD110
 TB1 -
A 
Single-phase
current
source -

 TB2 -A9
DC
power
supply  -B9
: Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element.

Figure 6.5.1 Operating Current Value Test Circuit
The output signal of testing element is assigned a configurable LED.

The output signal numbers of the elements are as follows:
Element Signal No. Element Signal No.
OC1-A 51 UC1-A 71
OC2-A 54 UC2-A 74
OC3-A 57 CBF-A 82
OC4-A 60
 Enter the signal number to observe the operation at the LED as shown in Section 6.5.1 and
 Apply a test current and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the
value at which the element operates.
Check that the measured value is within 5% of the setting value.
 145 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Operating time check for IDMT curve

GRD110
TB1 -
A ()
Single-phase
current
source - ()
TB3- ()
BO
- ()
 TB2 -A9
DC
power
supply  -B9
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
(), () : Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element.
Figure 6.5.2 Testing IDMT
One of the inverse time characteristics can be set, and the output signal numbers of the IDMT
elements are as follows:
Element Signal No.
OC1-A 51
OC2-A 54
Fix the time characteristic to test by setting the scheme switch MOCI on the "PF prot." screen.
"Set.(change)" sub-menu  "Protection" screen  "Change set. (Act gp.= )" screen 
"Group" screen  "Trip" screen  "Scheme sw" screen  "PF prot."
The test procedure is as follows:

 Enter the signal number to observe the operating time at a binary output relay as shown in
Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.
 Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should
be between 1.2  Is to 20  Is, where Is is the current setting.
 Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.1. Check that the measured operating time is within IEC 60255-3 class 5.
 146 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
6.5.1.2 Earth fault element EF1 to EF4 and SEF1 to SEF4

The earth fault element is checked on the operating current value and operating time for IDMT
curve.
Operating current check

GRD110
 A TB1 -5
Single-phase
current -6
source  
-7
-8
DC  TB2 -A9
power
supply  -B9
Figure 6.5.3 Test Circuit for EF and SEF Elements

EF1 63 SEF1 67
EF2 64 SEF2 68
EF3 65 SEF3 69
EF4 66 SEF4 70
 Apply a test current and change the magnitude of the current applied and measure the
value at which the element operates.
 147 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Operating time check for IDMT curve

GRD110
Single-phase TB1 - 5
A
current
source - 6

- 7
TB3- ()
- 8
BO 
- ()
 TB2 -A9
DC
power
supply  -B9
Start
Time
counter
Stop
OV
() : Connect the terminal number corresponding to the testing element.
Figure 6.5.4 Testing IDMT for EF and SEF Elements
One of the inverse time characteristics can be set, and the output signal numbers of the IDMT
elements are as follows:
EF1 63 SEF1 67
EF2 64 SEF2 68
Fix the time characteristic to test by setting the scheme switch MEFI or MSEI on the "EF prot."
or "SEF prot." screen.
"Set.(change)" sub-menu  "Protection" screen  "Change set. (Act gp.= )" screen 
"Group" screen  "Trip" screen  "Scheme sw" screen  "EF prot." or "SEF prot." screen
The test procedure is as follows:

 Enter the signal number to observe the operating time at a binary output relay as shown in
Section 6.5.1 and press the ENTER key.
 Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current should
be between 1.2  Is to 20  Is, where Is is the current setting.
 Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in Section
2.1.1. Check that the measured operating time is within IEC 60255-3 class 5.
6.5.1.3 Thermal overload element THMA and THMT

The testing circuit is same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.2.
 148 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

Element Signal No.
THMA 77
THMT 78
To test easily the thermal overload element, the scheme switch [THMRST] in the "Switch"
screen on the "Test" menu is used.
 Set the scheme switch [THMRST] to "ON".
 Apply a test current and measure the operating time. The magnitude of the test current
should be between 1.2  Is to 10  Is, where Is is the current setting.
CAUTION
After the setting of a test current, apply the test current after checking that the THM% has
become 0 on the "Metering" screen.
 Calculate the theoretical operating time using the characteristic equations shown in
Section 2.5. Check that the measured operating time is within 5%.
6.5.1.4 Negative sequence overcurrent element NPS1 and NPS2

GRD110
Ia TB1 -1
A
-2
Three-phase Ib
Current A -3
source -4
Ic
A -5
-6
 TB2 -A9
DC
power
supply  -B9
Figure 6.5.5 Testing NPS elements

Element Signal No.
NPS1 79
NPS2 80
 149 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

 Apply the three-phase balance current and the operating current value is checked by
increasing the magnitude of the current applied.
6.5.1.5 Broken conductor detection element BCD

GRD110
Ia TB1 -1
A
-2
Three-phase Ib
current A -3
source -4
Ic
A -5
-6
 TB2 -A9
DC
power
supply  -B9
Figure 6.5.6 Testing BCD element

Element Signal No.
BCD 81
 Apply the three-phase balance current at 10% of the rated current and interrupt a phase
current.
Then, check the BCD element operates.
6.5.1.6 Cold load protection

The testing circuit is same as the circuit shown in Figure 6.5.1.
To check the cold load protection function, the scheme switch [CLPTST] in the "Switch" screen
on the "Test" menu is used.
 Set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S0".
Check that the OC1 operates at the setting value of normal setting group.
 Next, set the scheme switch [CLPTST] to "S3".
Check that the OC1 operates at the setting value of cold load setting group [CLSG].
 150 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
6.5.2 Protection Scheme
In the protection scheme tests, a dynamic test set is required to simulate power system pre-fault,
fault and post-fault conditions.
Tripping is observed with the tripping command output relays.
Circuit Breaker failure tripping

 Set the scheme switch [BTC] to "ON" and [RTC] to "DIR" or "OC".
 Apply a fault, retain it and input an external trip signal. Check that the retrip output relays
operate after the time setting of the TCBF1 and the adjacent breaker tripping output relay
operates after the time setting of the TCBF2.
6.5.3 Metering and Recording
The metering function can be checked while testing the AC input circuit. See Section 6.4.4.
Fault recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. Open the "F. record" screen
and check that the descriptions are correct for the fault concerned.
Recording events are listed in Appendix C. There are internal events and external events by
binary input commands. Event recording on the external event can be checked by changing the
status of binary input command signals. Change the status in the same way as the binary input
circuit test (see Section 6.4.2) and check that the description displayed on the "E. Record" screen
is correct. Some of the internal events can be checked in the protection scheme tests.
Disturbance recording can be checked while testing the protection schemes. The LCD display
only shows the date and time when a disturbance is recorded. Open the "D. record" screen and
check that the descriptions are correct.
Details can be displayed on the PC. Check that the descriptions on the PC are correct. For details
on how to obtain disturbance records on the PC, see the RSM100 Manual.
 151 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
6.6 Conjunctive Tests

6.6.1 On Load Test
To check the polarity of the current transformers, check the load current with the metering
displays on the LCD screen.
 Open the "Auto-supervision" screen check that no message appears.
 Open the following "Metering" screen from the "Status" sub-menu to check the load current.
/ 2 M e t e r i n g
I a   .   K A
I b   .   K A
I c   .   K A
I e   .   K A
I s e   .    K A
I 1   .   K A
I 2   .   K A
I 2 / I 1   .  
T H M    .  %
I a m a x   .   K A
I b m a x   .   K A
I c m a x   .   K A
I e m a x   .   K A
I s e m a x   .    K A
I 2 m a x   .   K A
I 2 1 m a x   .  
Note: The magnitude of current can be set in values on the primary side or on the secondary side by
the setting. (The default setting is the primary side.)
6.6.2 Tripping and Reclosing Circuit Test
The tripping circuit including the circuit breaker is checked by forcibly operating the output relay
and monitoring the circuit breaker to confirm that it is tripped. Forcible operation of the output
relay is performed on the "Binary O/P " screen of the "Test" sub-menu as described in Section
6.4.3.
Tripping circuit
 Set the breaker to be closed.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
/ 2 B i n a r y O/ P
B O 1 0 _
B O 2 0
B O 3 0
B O 4 0
B O 5 0
 152 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
B O 6 0
B O 7 0
BO1 to BO7 are output relays with one normally open contact.
 Enter 1 for BO1 and press the ENTER key.
 Press the END key. Then the LCD displays the screen shown below.
Op e r a t e ?
 Keep pressing the ENTER key to operate the output relay BO1 and check that the A-phase
breaker is tripped.
 Stop pressing the ENTER key to reset the operation.
 Repeat the above for BO2 to BO7.
Reclosing circuit
 Ensure that the circuit breaker is open.
 Select "Binary O/P" on the "Test" sub-menu screen to display the "Binary O/P" screen.
 Select the BO number which is an autoreclose command output relay with one normally open
contact.
Note: The autoreclose command is assigned to any of the output relays by the user setting
 Operate the BO by the same manner as above.
 153 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
6.7 Maintenance
6.7.1 Regular Testing
The relay is almost completely self-supervised. The circuits that can not be supervised are binary
input and output circuits and human interfaces.
Therefore, regular testing is minimised to checking the unsupervised circuits. The test
procedures are the same as described in Sections 6.4.1, 6.4.2 and 6.4.3.
6.7.2 Failure Tracing and Repair

Failures will be detected by automatic supervision or regular testing.
When a failure is detected by supervision, a remote alarm is issued with the binary output relay of
FAIL and the failure is indicated on the front panel with LED indicators or LCD display. It is also
recorded in the event record.
Failures detected by supervision are traced by checking the "Err: " screen on the LCD. Table
6.7.1 shows LCD messages and failure locations.
The locations marked with (1) have a higher probability than locations marked with (2).
Table 6.7.1 LCD Message and Failure Location
Message Failure location

Relay Unit AC cable CB or cable
Err: SUM (Flash memory)
Err: RAM (SRAM)
Err: BRAM (Backup RAM)
Err: EEP (EEPROM)
Err: A/D (A/D converter)
Err: DC (DC power supply circuit)
Err: TC (Tripping circuit)(1)  (2)
Err: CT  (AC input circuit)(1)  (2)
Err: CB  (Circuit breaker)(1)  (2)
( ): Probable failure location in the relay unit including its peripheral circuits.
 154 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
If no message is shown on the LCD, this means that the failure location is either in the DC power
supply circuit or in the microprocessors. If the "ALARM" LED is off, the failure is in the DC
power supply circuit. If the LED is lit, the failure is in the microprocessors. Replace the relay unit
in both cases after checking if the correct DC voltage is applied to the relay.
If a failure is detected by automatic supervision or regular testing, replace the failed relay unit.
Note: When a failure or an abnormality is detected during the regular test, confirm the following
first:
- Test circuit connections are correct.
- Modules are securely inserted in position.
- Correct DC power voltage is applied.
- Correct AC inputs are applied.
- Test procedures comply with those stated in the manual.
6.7.3 Replacing Failed Relay Unit
If the failure is identified to be in the relay unit and the user has a spare relay unit, the user can
recover the protection by replacing the failed relay unit.
Repair at the site should be limited to relay unit replacement. Maintenance at the component
level is not recommended.
Check that the replacement relay unit has an identical Model Number and relay version (software
type form) as the removed relay.
The Model Number is indicated on the front of the relay. For the relay version, see Section
4.2.5.1.
Replacing the relay unit

CAUTION After replacing the relay unit, check the settings.
The procedure of relay withdrawal and insertion is as follows:

 Switch off the DC power supply.
WARNING Hazardous voltage may remain in the DC circuit just after switching off the
DC power supply. It takes about 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
 Disconnect the trip outputs.
 Short-circuit all AC current inputs.
 Unscrew the relay front cover.
 Unscrew the binding screw on the handle.
 To remove the relay unit from its case, pull up the handle and pull the handle towards you.
(See Figure 6.7.1.)
 Insert the (spare) relay unit in the reverse procedure.
CAUTION To avoid risk of damage:
 Keep the handle up when inserting the relay unit into the case.
 Do not catch the handle when carrying the relay unit.
 Check that the relay unit and its case have the identical Model Number
when inserting the relay unit.
 155 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
IN SERVICE VIEW IN SERVICE

VIEW
TRIP TRIP
ALARM ALARM
RESET RESET
CAN CAN
CEL ENTER CEL ENTER
END
Pull up handle
Handle
Bind screw
Figure 6.7.1 Handle of Relay Unit
Front view Front view

6.7.4 Resumption of Service
After replacing the failed relay unit or repairing failed external circuits, take the following
procedures to restore the relay to the service.
 Switch on the DC power supply and confirm that the "IN SERVICE" green LED is lit and the
"ALARM" red LED is not lit.
 Supply the AC inputs and reconnect the trip outputs.
6.7.5 Storage
The spare relay should be stored in a dry and clean room. Based on IEC Standard 60255-6 the
storage temperature should be 25C to +70C, but the temperature of 0C to +40C is
recommended for long-term storage.
 156 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
7. Putting Relay into Service

The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing
the commissioning tests or maintenance tests.
 Check that all the external connections are correct.
 Check the settings of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock
are correct.
In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for testing, be sure to restore them.
 Clear any unnecessary records on faults, events and disturbances which are recorded during
the tests.
 Press the VIEW key and check that no failure message is displayed on the
"Auto-supervision" screen.
 Check that the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.
 157 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 158 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix A
and Implementation of Thermal Model
to IEC60255-8
 159 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

The overcurrent stages for phase and earth faults, OC1 and EF1, each have a programmable reset
feature. Resetting may be instantaneous, definite time delayed, or, in the case of IEEE/US curves,
inverse time delayed.
Instantaneous resetting is normally applied in multi-shot auto-reclosing schemes, to ensure correct
grading between relays at various points in the scheme. On the other hand, the inverse reset
characteristic is particularly useful to provide correct co-ordination with an upstream induction disc type
overcurrent relay.
The definite time delayed reset characteristic may be used to provide faster clearance of intermittent
(‘pecking’ or ‘flashing’) fault conditions. An example of where such phenomena may be experienced is
in plastic insulated cables, where the fault energy melts the cable insulation and temporarily
extinguishes the fault, after which the insulation again breaks down and the process repeats.
An inverse time overcurrent protection with instantaneous resetting cannot detect this condition until the
fault becomes permanent, thereby allowing a succession of such breakdowns to occur, with associated
damage to plant and danger to personnel. If a definite time reset delay of, for example, 60 seconds is
applied, on the other hand, the inverse time element does not reset immediately after each successive
fault occurrence. Instead, with each new fault inception, it continues to integrate from the point reached
during the previous breakdown, and therefore operates before the condition becomes permanent. Figure
A-1 illustrates this theory.
Intermittent
Fault Condition
TRIP LEVEL
Inverse Time Relay

with Instantaneous
Reset
TRIP LEVEL
Inverse Time Relay

with Definite Time
Reset
Delayed Reset
Figure A-1
 160 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Implementation of Thermal Model to IEC60255-8

Heating by overload current and cooling by dissipation of an electrical system follow exponential time
constants. The thermal characteristics of the electrical system can be shown by equation (1).
I2  t 
 = 1  e    100% (1)
I AOL 
2 
where:
 = thermal state of the system as a percentage of allowable thermal capacity,
I = applied load current,
IAOL = allowable overload current of the system,
 = thermal time constant of the system.
The thermal stateθis expressed as a percentage of the thermal capacity of the protected system, where
0% represents the cold state and 100% represents the thermal limit, that is the point at which no further
temperature rise can be safely tolerated and the system should be disconnected. The thermal limit for
any given electrical plant is fixed by the thermal setting IAOL. The relay gives a trip output when θ =
100%.
If current I is applied to a cold system, then  will rise exponentially from 0% to (I2/IAOL2 × 100%), with time
constant , as in Figure A-2. If  = 100%, then the allowable thermal capacity of the system has been reached.
 (%)
100%
I2 2 100%
I AOL
2  t 
  I I 2 1  e 

 100%
AOL
t (s)
Figure A-2
A thermal overload protection relay can be designed to model this function, giving tripping times
according to the IEC60255-8 ‘Hot’ and ‘Cold’ curves.
 I2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2  (1) ∙∙∙∙∙ Cold curve
 I  I AOL 
 I2  I 2 
t =τ·Ln  2 2P  (2) ∙∙∙∙∙ Hot curve
 I  I AOL 
where:
 161 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
IP = prior load current.

In fact, the cold curve is simply a special case of the hot curve where prior load current IP = 0, catering
for the situation where a cold system is switched on to an immediate overload.
Figure A-3 shows a typical thermal profile for a system which initially carries normal load current, and
is then subjected to an overload condition until a trip results, before finally cooling to ambient
temperature.
() Overload Current

Condition Trip at 100%
100%
Normal Load
Current Condition Cooling Curve
t (s)
Figure A-3
 162 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix B
Signal List
 163 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
No. SIGNAL NAME Contents

0 Not in use
1 BI1 COMMAND Binary input signal of BI1
9
10
11 SET.GROUP1 BI command of change active setting group1
15 OC1 BLOCK BI command of OC1 protection scheme block
19 EF1 BLOCK BI command of EF1 protection scheme block
23 SEF1 BLOCK BI command of SEF1 protection scheme block
27 UC BLOCK BI command of UC protection scheme block
28 THM BLOCK BI command of Thermal overload protection scheme block
29 NPS BLOCK BI command of NPS protection scheme block
30 BCD BLOCK BI command of Bloken Conductor protection scheme block
31 TC FAIL BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm
32 CB CONT OPN BI command of CB N/O contact
33 CB CONT CLS BI command of CB N/C contact
34 EXT TRIP-3PH BI command of External trip (3 Phase)
35 EXT TRIP-APH BI command of External trip (A Phase)
36 EXT TRIP-BPH BI command of External trip (B Phase)
37 EXT TRIP-CPH BI command of External trip (C Phase)
38 REMOTE RESET BI command of Remote reset
39 SYNC CLOCK BI command of Synchronise Clock
40 STORE RECORD BI command of Store Disturbance Record
41 ALARM1 BI command of Alarm1
45
46
47
48
49
50
51 OC1-A OC1-A relay element output
52 OC1-B OC1-B relay element output
53 OC1-C OC1-C relay element output
 164 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

63 EF1 EF1 relay element output
67 SEF1 SEF1 relay element output
71 UC1-A UC1-A relay element output
72 UC1-B UC1-B relay element output
73 UC1-C UC1-C relay element output
74 UC2-A UC2-A relay element output
75 UC2-B UC2-B relay element output
76 UC2-C UC2-C relay element output
77 THM-A THERMAL Alarm relay element output
78 THM-T THERMAL Trip relay element output
79 NPS1 NPS1 relay element output
80 NPS2 NPS2 relay element output
81 BCD BCD relay element output
82 CBF-A CBF-A relay element output
83 CBF-B CBF-B relay element output
84 CBF-C CBF-C relay element output
85 ICLDO-A ICLDO-A relay (OC relay) element output used in "CLP scheme"
86 ICLDO-B ICLDO-B relay (OC relay) element output used in "CLP scheme"
87 ICLDO-C ICLDO-C relay (OC relay) element output used in "CLP scheme"
88 OC1-A HS High speed output of OC1-A relay
89 OC1-B HS High speed output of OC1-B relay
90 OC1-C HS High speed output of OC1-C relay
91 EF1 HS High speed output of EF1 relay
92 SEF1 HS High speed output of SEF1 relay
93 OC1-A_INST OC1-A relay element start
94 OC1-B_INST OC1-B relay element start
95 OC1-C_INST OC1-C relay element start
96 EF1_INST EF1 relay element start
97 SEF1_INST SEF1relay element start
98 OC1_INST OC1 relay element start
99
100
101 OC1 TRIP OC1 trip command
102 OC1-A TRIP OC1 trip command (A Phase)
103 OC1-B TRIP OC1 trip command (B Phase)
104 OC1-C TRIP OC1 trip command (C Phase)
113 OC4 ALARM OC4 alarm command
114 OC4-A ALARM OC4 alarm command (A Phase)
115 OC4-B ALARM OC4 alarm command (B Phase)
116 OC4-C ALARM OC4 alarm command (C Phase)
117 EF1 TRIP EF1 trip command
120 EF4 ALARM EF4 alarm command
 165 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

121 SEF1-S1 TRIP SEF1 Stage1 trip command
122 SEF1-S2 TRIP SEF1 Stage2 trip command
123 SEF2 TRIP SEF2 trip command
124 SEF3 TRIP SEF3 trip command
125 SEF4 ALARM SEF4 alarm command
126 UC1 TRIP UC1 trip command
127 UC1-A TRIP UC1 trip command (A Phase)
128 UC1-B TRIP UC1 trip command (B Phase)
129 UC1-C TRIP UC1 trip command (C Phase)
130 UC2 ALARM UC2 alarm command
131 UC2-A ALARM UC2 alarm command (A Phase)
132 UC2-B ALARM UC2 alarm command (B Phase)
133 UC2-C ALARM UC2 alarm command (C Phase)
134 THM ALARM Thermal alarm command
135 THM TRIP Thermal trip command
136 NPS1 TRIP NPS1 trip command
137 NPS2 TRIP NPS2 trip command
138 BCD TRIP BCD trip command
139 CBF RETRIP CBF retrip command
140 CBF TRIP CBF back trip command
141 GEN.TRIP General trip command
142 GEN.TRIP-A General trip command (A Phase)
143 GEN.TRIP-B General trip command (B Phase)
144 GEN.TRIP-C General trip command (C Phase)
145 GEN.TRIP-EF General trip command (EF)
146 CLP STATE0 Cold Load Protection State
150 GEN. ALARM General alarm command
151
152
153 OC2-A_INST OC2-A relay element start
154 OC2-B_INST OC2-B relay element start
155 OC2-C_INST OC2-C relay element start
156 EF2_INST EF2 relay element start
157 SEF2_INST SEF2relay element start
158 OC2_INST OC2 relay element start
159
160 A. M. F. OFF Automatic monitoring function off
161 RELAY FAIL Relay failure & trip blocked alarm
162 RELAY FAIL-A Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)
163 TCSV Trip circuit supervision failure
164 CBSV Circuit breaker status monitoring failure
165 TC ALARM Trip counter alarm
166 SGM_I^y ALM ΣIY alarm
167 OT ALARM Operate time alarm
168
169
170 BO1 OP Binary output 1
177
178
179
180
 166 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

181 LCD IND. LCD indication(Virtual LED) command
182 LCD IND1. LCD indication1(Virtual LED) command
183 LCD IND2. LCD indication2(Virtual LED) command
184
185
186 TESTING Testing LED lit output
187
188
189
190
191
192
193 PROT. COM. ON IEC103 communication command
194 IECTST IEC103 communication test
195 IECBLK IEC103 communication block
196
197
198
199
200
201 ARC BLOCK Autoreclose block
202 ARC READY Autoreclose ready
203 ARC INIT Autoreclose initiation
204 MANUAL CLOSE Manual close
205 ARC N/A Autoreclose not available
206 ARC REQ Autoreclose requirement
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221 ARC READY T Autoreclose ready time
222
223 ARC SHOT Autoreclose shot output
224 ARC SHOT1 Autoreclose shot output of number 1
229 ARC FT ARC final trip
230 ARC SUCCESS ARC success
231 ARC FAIL ARC fail
232 ARC COORD ARC coordination
233 OC COORD-A OC-A coordination element
234 OC COORD-B OC-B coordination element
235 OC COORD-C OC-C coordination element
236 EF COORD EF coordination element
237 SEF COORD SEF coordination element
238
239
240
 167 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261 ICD-A ICD-A relay element output signal
262 ICD-B ICD-B relay element output signal
263 ICD-C ICD-C relay element output signal
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
 168 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix C
Event Record Items
 169 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Event Record Item

No. LCD indication Contents
1 GEN.trip Off/On General trip command
2 GEN.trip-A Off/On ditto (A Phase)
3 GEN.trip-B Off/On ditto (B Phase)
4 GEN.trip-C Off/On ditto (C Phase)
5 GEN.trip-EF Off/On ditto (EF)
6 OC1-A trip Off/On OC1 trip command (A Phase)
7 OC1-B trip Off/On OC1 trip command (B Phase)
8 OC1-C trip Off/On OC1 trip command (C Phase)
15 OC4-A alarm Off/On OC4 alarm command (A Phase)
16 OC4-B alarm Off/On OC4 alarm command (B Phase)
17 OC4-C alarm Off/On OC4 alarm command (C Phase)
18 EF1 trip Off/On EF1 trip command
21 EF4 alarm Off/On EF4 alarm command
22 SEF1-S1 trip Off/On SEF1 Stage1 trip command
23 SEF1-S2 trip Off/On SEF1 Stage2 trip command
24 SEF2 trip Off/On SEF2 trip command
25 SEF3 trip Off/On SEF3 trip command
26 SEF4 alarm Off/On SEF4 alarm command
27 UC1-A trip Off/On UC1 trip(A Phase)
28 UC1-B trip Off/On UC1 trip(B Phase)
29 UC1-C trip Off/On UC1 trip(C Phase)
30 UC2-A alarm Off/On UC2 alarm(A Phase)
31 UC2-B alarm Off/On UC2 alarm(B Phase)
32 UC2-C alarm Off/On UC2 alarm(C Phase)
33 THM alarm Off/On Thermal alarm command
34 THM trip Off/On Thermal trip command
35 NPS1 trip Off/On NPS1 trip command
36 NPS2 alarm Off/On NPS2 alarm command
37 BCD trip Off/On BCD trip command
38 CBF retrip Off/On CBF retrip command
39 CBF trip Off/On CBF back trip command
40 ARC READY T Off/On Auto-Reclosing ready
41 ARC SHOT Off/On Auto-Reclosing shot of number
42 ARC IN-PROG Off/On Auto-Reclosing in progress
43 OC1-A Off/On OC1-A relay element operating
44 OC1-B Off/On OC1-B relay element operating
45 OC1-C Off/On OC1-C relay element operating
 170 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Event Record Item

55 OC1-A INST Off/On OC1-A relay pick up element operating
56 OC1-B INST Off/On OC1-B relay pick up element operating
57 OC1-C INST Off/On OC1-C relay pick up element operating
58 OC2-A INST Off/On OC2-A relay pick up element operating
59 OC2-B INST Off/On OC2-B relay pick up element operating
60 OC2-C INST Off/On OC2-C relay pick up element operating
61 EF1 Off/On EF1 relay element operating
65 EF1 INST Off/On EF1 relay pick up element operating
66 EF2 INST Off/On EF2 relay pick up element operating
67 SEF1 Off/On SEF1 relay element operating
71 SEF1 INST Off/On SEF1 relay pick up element operating
72 SEF2 INST Off/On SEF2 relay pick up element operating
73 UC1-A Off/On UC1-A relay element operating
74 UC1-B Off/On UC1-B relay element operating
75 UC1-C Off/On UC1-C relay element operating
76 UC2-A Off/On UC2-A relay element operating
77 UC2-B Off/On UC2-B relay element operating
78 UC2-C Off/On UC2-C relay element operating
79 NPS1 Off/On NPS1 relay element operating
80 NPS2 Off/On NPS2 relay element operating
81 BCD Off/On BCD relay element operating
82 CLP STATE0 Off/On Cold Load Protection State
83 CLP STATE1 Off/On ditto
86 BI1 command Off/On Binary input signal of BI1
94 SET.group1 Off/On BI command of change active setting group1
98 OC1 block Off/On BI command of OC1 protection scheme block
 171 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Event Record Item

102 EF1 block Off/On BI command of EF1 protection scheme block
106 SEF1 block Off/On BI command of SEF1 protection scheme block
110 UC block Off/On BI command of UC protection scheme block
111 THM block Off/On BI command of Thermal overload protection scheme block
112 NPS block Off/On BI command of NPS protection scheme block
113 BCD block Off/On BI command of Broken Conductor protection scheme block
114 TC fail Off/On BI command of Trip circuit Fail Alarm
115 CB CONT OPN Off/On BI command of CB N/O contact
116 CB CONT CLS Off/On BI command of CB N/C contact
117 EXT trip-3PH Off/On BI command of External trip (3 Phase)
118 EXT trip-APH Off/On BI command of External trip (A Phase)
119 EXT trip-BPH Off/On BI command of External trip (B Phase)
120 EXT trip-CPH Off/On BI command of External trip (C Phase)
121 Remote reset Off/On BI command of Remote reset
122 SYNC slock Off/On BI command of Synchronise Clock
123 Store record Off/On BI command of Store Disturbance Record
124 Alarm1 Off/On BI command of Alarm1
128 ARC ready Off/On Auto-Reclosing ready condition
129 ARC block Off/On Auto-Reclosing block
130 ARC N/A Off/On Auto-Reclosing no action
131 ARC INIT Off/On Auto-Reclosing initiation
132 Manual CLS Off/On Manual Close
133 ARC REQ Off/On Auto-Reclosing requirement
134 Relay fail Off/On Relay failure & trip blocked alarm
135 Relay fail-A Off/On Relay failure alarm (Trip not blocked)
136 TC err Off/On Trip circiut supervision failure
137 CB err Off/On Circuit breaker status monitoring failure
138 CT err Off/On CT circuit supervision failure
139 TP COUNT ALM Off/On Trip counter alarm
140 ΣI^yA ALM Off/On ΣIY A-phase alarm
141 ΣI^yB ALM Off/On ΣIY B-phase alarm
142 ΣI^yC ALM Off/On ΣIY C-phase alarm
143 OP time ALM Off/On Operate time alarm
144 ARC SHOT1 On Auto-Reclosing shot of number1
149 ARC FT On Auto-Reclosing failed (Final trip)
150 ARC SUCCESS On Auto-Reclosing succeed
 172 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Event Record Item

151 ARC FAIL On Auto-Reclosing conf irmation
152 ARC RESET On Auto-Reclosing reset
153 ARC COORD On Auto-Reclosing coordination
154 ARC COORD RESET On Auto-Reclosing coordination reset
155 F.record CLR On Clear Fault records
156 E.record CLR On Clear Ev ent records
157 D.record CLR On Clear Disturbance records
158 TP COUNT CLR On Clear Trip counter
159 ΣI^y CLR On Clear ΣIY counter
160 AR COUNT CLR On Clear Autoreclose counter
161 Max.DEM CLR On Clear Max. demand(Imax)
162 IND.reset On Reset the indication of Trip mode,Alarm etc
163 Data lost On Record and time date lost by e DC power supply of f f or a long time
164 Sy s.change On Sy stem setting change command
165 Rly .change On Relay setting change command
166 Grp.change On Group setting change command
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
 173 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 174 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix D
Binary Output Default Setting List
 175 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Relay Model BO No. Terminal No. Signal Name Contents Setting

Signal No. Logic Reset
(OR:0, AND:1) (Inst:0, Del:1 Latch:2)
TB3:
GRD110-500 BO1 A5-B4, A4 GENERAL TRIP Relay trip (General) 141 0 1
BO2 A6-A7, B7 GENERAL TRIP Relay trip (General) 141 0 1
BO3 A9-B8, A8 GENERAL TRIP Relay trip (General) 141 0 1
BO4 A11-A10, B10 ARC SHOT Autoreclose shot 223 0 1
BO5 A12-A13, B13 OC1 TRIP OC1 element trip 101 0 1
BO7 B16-A16 EF1 TRIP EF1 element trip 117 0 1
TB3:
GRD110-520 BO1 A5-B4, A4 GENERAL TRIP Relay trip (General) 141 0 1
BO2 A6-A7, B7 GENERAL TRIP Relay trip (General) 141 0 1
BO3 A9-B8, A8 GENERAL TRIP Relay trip (General) 141 0 1
BO4 A11-A10, B10 ARC SHOT Autoreclose shot 223 0 1
BO6 A15-A14, B14 EF1 TRIP EF1 element trip 117 0 1
BO7 B16-A16 SEF1-S1 TRIP SEF1 stage1 trip 121 0 1
 176 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix E
Details of Relay Menu and
LCD & Button Operation
 177 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
MENU
Record
Status
Set. (view)
Set. (change)
Test
/1 Record
F. record
E. record
D. record
Counter
/2 F.record /3 F.record /4 F.record #1

Display 16/Jul/2002
Clear #1 16/Jul/2002
Refer to Section 18:13:57.031
4.2.3.1.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 E.record /3 E.record
Display
Clear 16/Jul/2002
Refer to Section Ext. trip A On
4.2.3.2.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
/2 D.record /3 D.record
Display
Clear #1 16/Jul/2002
Refer to Section 18:13:57.401
4.2.3.3.
Clear records?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1 b-1
 178 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
a-1 b-1
/2 Counter /3 Counter
Display Trips *****
Clear Trips TripsA *****
Clear Trips A TripsB *****
Clear Trips B TripsC *****
Clear Trips C  I^yA ******E6
Clear  I^yA  I^yB ******E6
Clear  I^yB  I^yC ******E6
Clear  I^yC ARCs *****
Clear ARCs
Refer to Section Clear Trips?
4.2.3.4. END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips A?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips B?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear Trips C?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear  I^yA?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear  I^yB?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear  I^yC?
END=Y CANCEL=N
Clear ARCs?
END=Y CANCEL=N
a-1
 179 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
a-1
/1 Status /2 Metering
Metering la **.** kA
Binary I/O
/2 Binary I/O
Relay element
IP [0000 0000]
Time sync.
Clock adjust. /2 Ry element
LCD contrast A OC1-4[0000 ]
Refer to Section 4.2.4.
/2 Time sync.
*BI: Act.
/2 12/Nov/2002
22:56:19 [L]
/2 LCD contrast
/1 Set. (view)
Version
Description
Comms
Record
Status
Protection
Binary I/P
Binary O/P Refer to Section 4.2.5
LED
/2 Version GRD110-500A-11
Relay type -11
Serial No.
Software 

/2 Description GS1DM1-08-*
Plant name
Description
/2 Comms /3 Addr./Param.
Addr./Param.
Switch
/3 Switch
a-1, b-2
 180 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
a-1 b-2
/2 Record /3 E.record
E.record
D.record BI1 comm. 3
Counter N/O/R/B
:
/3 D.record /4 Time/starter
Time/starter Time 2.0s
Scheme sw
/4 Scheme sw
Binary sig.
/4 Binary sig.
/3 Counter /4 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/4 Alarm set
/3 Metering TCALM 10000
/2 Status
Metering
Time sync.
/3 Time sync.
/2 Act. gp. =*
Common
Group1
:
Group4
/3 Common
/3 Group1
Parameter
Trip
ARC
/4 Parameter 
Line name 
CT ratio
/5 CT ratio
a-1 b-2 c-1 d-1
OCCT 400
 181 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
a-1 b-2 c-1 d-1
/4 Trip /5 Scheme sw /6 Application

Scheme sw Application
Prot.element PF prot.
EF prot. /6 PF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc. prot.
/6 EF prot.
/6 SEF prot.
/6 Misc. prot.
/5 Prot.element /6 PF prot.
PF prot. OC1 1.00A
EF prot.
SEF prot. /6 EF prot.
Misc. prot. EF1 0.30A
/6 SEF prot.
SE1 0.100A
/5 ARC /6 Misc. prot.

Scheme sw THM 1.00A
Timers
/6 Scheme SW /7 General
General
OC /7 OC
EF
SEF
EXT /7 EF
/6 Timers
TRDY 60.0s /7 SEF
/7 EXT
a-1 b-2 C-1
 182 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
a-1 b-2 c-1
/3 Group2
Parameter
/3 Group4
Parameter
/2 Binary I/P /3 BI1 /4 Timers

BI1 Timers BI1PUD 0.00s
BI2 Functions
BI3 /4 Functions
BI4
BI5
BI6 /3 BI8
BI7 Timers
BI8 Functions
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text 
Alarm3 Text
Alarm4 Text Alarm Text
/2 Binary O/P
BO1 AND, D
1, 10, 29, 0
BO7 OR , L
1, 2, 3, 4
/2 LED /3 LED
LED
Virtual LED
/3 Virtual LED /4 LED1
IND1 BIT1 I,O
IND2
/4 LED2
BIT1 I,O
a-1
 183 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
a-1
/1 Set.(change)
Password
Description : Password trap
Comms Password [_ ]
Record 1234567890
Status
: Confirmation trap
Protection
Change settings?
Binary I/P
ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
Binary O/P
LED
Input [_ ] Retype [_ ]
1234567890 1234567890
Refer to Section 4.2.6.2.
/2 Description _
Plant name ABCDEFG
Description
_
Refer to Section
4.2.6.3. ABCDEFG
/2 Comms /3 Addr./Param.
Addr./Param.
Switch
Refer to Section
/3 Switch
4.2.6.4.
/2 Record /3 E.record
E.record
D.record BI1 comm. 3 _
Counter N/O/R/B
: /4 Time/starter
Refer to Section
4.2.6.5. :
/3 D.record /4 Scheme sw
Time/starter
Scheme sw
/4 Binary sig.
Binary sig.
/3 Counter /4 Scheme sw
Scheme sw
Alarm set
/4 Alarm set
a-1 b-3
 184 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
a-1 b-3
/2 Status /3 Metering
Metering
Time sync.
/3 Time sync.
Refer to Section
4.2.6.6.
/2 Protection
Change act. gp.
Change set. Refer to Section
Copy gp. 4.2.6.7.
/3 Change act.
gp.
/3 Act gp.=1
Common
Group1
Group2
Group3
Group4
/4 Common
/4 Group1
Parameter
Trip
ARC
/5 Parameter _
Line name ABCDEFG
CT ratio
/6 CT ratio
a-1 b-3 c-2 d-2 e-1
 185 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
a-1 b-3 c-2 d-2 e-1
/5 Trip /6 Scheme sw /7 Application

Scheme sw Application
Prot.element PF prot.
EF prot. /7 PF prot.
SEF prot.
Misc. prot.
/7 EF prot.
/7 SEF prot.
/7 Misc. prot.
/6 Prot.element /7 PF prot.
PF prot.
EF prot.
SEF prot. /7 EF prot.
Misc. prot.
/7 SEF prot.
/7 Misc. prot.
/5 ARC
Scheme sw
Timers
/6 Scheme SW /7 General
General
OC /7 OC
EF
SEF
EXT /7 EF
/6 Timers
/7 SEF
/7 EXT
a-1, b-3 c-2 d-2
 186 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
a-1 b-3 c-2 d-2
/4 Group2
Parameter
/4 Group4
Parameter
/3 Copy A to B
A _
B _
/2 Binary I/P /3 BI1 /4 Timers

BI1 Timers
BI2 Functions
BI3 /4 Functions
BI4
BI5
BI6 /3 BI8
BI7 Timers
BI8 Functions
Alarm1 Text
Alarm2 Text 
Alarm3 Text ABCDEFG
Alarm4 Text Alarm Text
Refer to Section
4.2.6.8.
/2 Binary O/P /3 BO1 /4 Logic/Reset

BO1 Logic/Reset
Functions
/4 Functions
BO7
Refer to Section /3 BO7
4.2.6.9. Logic/Reset
Functions
a-1 b-3
 187 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
a-1 b-3
/2 LED
LED
Refer to Section
Virtual LED 4.2.6.10.
/3 LED /4 LED1 /5 Logic/Reset

LED1 Logic/Reset
Functions
/5 Functions
LED3
/4 LED3
Logic/Reset
Functions
/3 Virtual LED /4 IND1 /5 Reset

IND1 Reset
IND2 Functions
/5 Functions
/4 IND2
Reset
Functions
/1 Test /2 Switch
Switch
Binary O/P A.M.F. 1 _
Refer to Section 4.2.7. Off/On
CLPTST 0
Off/S0/S3
THMRST 0
Off/On
SHOTNUM 0
Off/S1-S6
IECTST 0
Off/On
/2 Binary O/P Operate?

ENTER=Y CANCEL=N
BO1 0 _
Disable/Enable
BO7 0
Disable/Enable
 188 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
LCD AND BUTTON OPERATION INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
MODE
1. PRESS ARROW KEY TO MOVE TO EACH DISPLAYED
ITEMS
NORMAL
2. PRESS "END" KEY TO BACK TO PREVIOUS SCREEN
(DISPLAY OFF)
1=RECORD
PRESS ANY
BUTTON
EXCEPT FOR MENU 1=FAULT RECORD
VIEW "VIEW" AND ( DISPLAY ON )
"RESET"
2=EVENT RECORD
3=DISTURBANCE RECORD
METERING 1
( DISPLAY ON ) 4=COUNTER
2=STATUS
VIEW RESET
1=METERING
2=BINARY INPUT&OUPUT
METERING 5 AUTO- 3=RELAY ELELMENT

( DISPLAY ON )
MODE 1 4=TIME SYNC SOURCE
TRIP OUTPUT 5=CLOCK ADJUSTMENT

ISSUED !
VIEW RESET
TRIP 3=SETTING
( LED ON ) (VIEW)
1=RELAY VERSION
2=DESCRIPTION
LATEST FAULT * AUTO-
( DISPLAY ON ) 3=COMMUNICATION
MODE 2
4=RECORD
RELAY
FAILED ! 5=STATUS
VIEW RESET
ALARM 6=PROTECTION
( LED ON )
7=BINARY INPUT
8=BINARY OUTPUT
AUTO SUPERVISON *
9=LED
( DISPLAY ON )
*. "LATEST FAULT" AND "AUTO
SUPERVISION" SCREEN IS 4=SETTING
DISPLAYED ONLY IF DATA (CHANGE) Same as SETTING (VIEW) menu
IS STORED
VIEW RESET
5=TEST
1=SWITCH
2=BINARY OUTPUT
 189 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 190 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix F
Case Outline
 191 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
IN SERVICE VIEW
TRIP
ALARM
25 8
RESET
CAN
CEL ENTER
END
15.6 185.2 32
104
Side view
Front view
4 holes-4.5 4 holes-5.5
TB4
TB1 TB3
TB2
24 9
239
Rear view 56
102
TB4
A1 A3
B1 B3 Panel cut-out
TB3
TB1
A1 B1
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
TB2
A1 B1
TB1,TB2,TB3: Screw terminal

(M3.5 Ring)
TB4: Screw terminal
A10 B10
TB4 is provided only for RS485
two ports model.
A18 B18
Terminal block
Case Outline
 192 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix G
Typical External Connection
 193 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
GRD110 - 500, “3P” setting

BUSBAR
OUTPUT CONTACTS
TB1-
TB3- SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
1
B4
2 IA BO1 GENERAL TRIP
3 A4
CT BO1 BO2 GENERAL TRIP
4 IB A5
5 BO3 GENERAL TRIP
B5
CB 6 IC BO4 ARC SHOT
A7
7 BO5 OC1 TRIP
8 IN B7
BO2 BO6 OC1 TRIP
A6
B6 BO7 EF1 TRIP
FRAME EARTH
B8
A8
BO3
(P) A9
TB2- B9
A1
BI1 COMMAND BI1 A10
B1
A2 B10
BI2 COMMAND BI2 BO4
1
B2 A11
A3 B11
BI3 COMMAND BI3
B3 A13
BI4 COMMAND A4 B13
B4 BI4 BO5
A12
A5 B12
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5
A14
A6
BI6 COMMAND BI6 B14
B6 BO6
A7 A15
BI7 COMMAND BI7
B7 B15
A8 A16
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8 BO7 B16
(N)
B17
A17
FAIL
A18
B18
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL.
TB3-A2
TB2- A9 +5Vdc COM1-A
DC (+) B2 ()
SUPPLY DC-DC
(-) B9 A1
0V COM1-B
B1 () RS485 I/F for RSM, IEC60870-5-103
A10 A3
COM1-0V
() B10 B3 ()
FRAME EARTH
E TB4-A2
CASE EARTH COM2-A
B2
A1
COM2-B
B1 RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103
(Two ports model only)
A3
COM2-0V
B3
()This connection is connected by short bar before shipment.
 194 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
BUSBAR
OUTPUT CONTACTS
TB1-
1
B4
3 A4
4 IC A5
5 BO3 GENERAL TRIP
B5
CB 6 IN BO4 ARC SHOT
7 A7
BO5 OC1 TRIP
8 B7
BO2 BO6 OC1 TRIP
A6
BO7 EF1 TRIP
FRAME EARTH B6
B8
A8
BO3
(P) A9
TB2- B9
A1
BI1 COMMAND BI1 A10
B1
A2 B10
BI2 COMMAND BI2 BO4
1
B2 A11
A3 B11
BI3 COMMAND BI3
B3 A13
BI4 COMMAND A4 B13
B4 BI4 BO5
A12
A5 B12
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5
A14
A6
BI6 COMMAND BI6
B6 BO6 B14
A7 A15
BI7 COMMAND BI7
B7 B15
A8 A16
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8 BO7 B16
(N)
B17
FAIL A17
A18
B18
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL.
TB3-A2
DC (+) B2 ()
DC-DC
SUPPLY B9 A1
(-) 0V COM1-B
B1 () RS485 I/F for RSM, IEC60870-5-103
A10 A3
COM1-0V
() B10 B3 ()
FRAME EARTH
E TB4-A2
CASE EARTH COM2-A
B2
A1
COM2-B
B1 RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103
A3
COM2-0V
B3
 195 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
BUSBAR
OUTPUT CONTACTS
TB1-
1
B4
2 BO1 GENERAL TRIP
3 A4
4 A5
5 BO3 GENERAL TRIP
B5
CB 6 IN BO4 ARC SHOT
A7
7 BO5 OC1 TRIP
8 B7
BO2 BO6 OC1 TRIP
A6
B6 BO7 EF1 TRIP
FRAME EARTH
B8
A8
BO3
(P) A9
TB2-
B9
A1
BI1 COMMAND BI1 A10
B1
A2 B10
BI2 COMMAND BI2 BO4
1
B2 A11
A3 B11
BI3 COMMAND BI3
B3 A13
BI4 COMMAND A4 B13
B4 BI4 BO5
A12
A5 B12
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5
A14
A6
BI6 COMMAND BI6
B6 B14
BO6
A7 A15
BI7 COMMAND BI7
B7 B15
A8 A16
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8 BO7 B16
(N)
B17
FAIL A17
A18
B18
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL.
TB3-A2
DC (+) B2 ()
DC-DC
SUPPLY B9 A1
(-) 0V COM1-B
B1 () RS485 I/F for RSM, IEC60870-5-103
A10 A3
COM1-0V
() B10 B3 ()
FRAME EARTH
E TB4-A2
CASE EARTH COM2-A
B2
A1
COM2-B
B1 RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103
A3
COM2-0V
B3
 196 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

BUSBAR
CT OUTPUT CONTACTS
TB1-
1
B4
Core balance 3 A4
BO1 BO2 GENERAL TRIP
CT 4 IB A5
5 BO3 GENERAL TRIP
B5
6 IC BO4 ARC SHOT
A7
7 BO5 OC1 TRIP
CB 8 ISE B7
BO2 BO6 EF1 TRIP
A6
BO7 SEF1-S1 TRIP
FRAME EARTH B6
B8
A8
BO3
(P) A9
TB2-
B9
A1
BI1 COMMAND BI1 A10
B1
A2 B10
BI2 COMMAND BI2 BO4
1
B2 A11
A3 B11
BI3 COMMAND BI3
B3 A13
BI4 COMMAND A4 B13
B4 BI4 BO5
A12
A5 B12
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5
A14
A6
BI6 COMMAND BI6 B14
B6 BO6
A7 A15
BI7 COMMAND BI7
B7 B15
A8 A16
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8 BO7 B16
(N)
B17
FAIL A17
A18
B18
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL.
TB3-A2
DC (+) B2 ()
SUPPLY DC-DC
(-) B9 A1
0V COM1-B
B1 () RS485 I/F for RSM, IEC60870-5-103
A10 A3
COM1-0V
() B10 B3 ()
FRAME EARTH
E TB4-A2
CASE EARTH COM2-A
B2
A1
COM2-B
B1 RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103
A3
COM2-0V
B3
 197 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

BUSBAR
CT OUTPUT CONTACTS
TB1-
1
B4
Core balance 3 A4
4 IC A5
5 BO3 GENERAL TRIP
B5
6 IN BO4 ARC SHOT
7 A7
BO5 OC1 TRIP
CB 8 ISE B7
BO2 BO6 EF1 TRIP
A6
BO7 SEF1-S1 TRIP
FRAME EARTH B6
B8
A8
BO3
(P) A9
TB2-
B9
A1
BI1 COMMAND BI1 A10
B1
A2 B10
BI2 COMMAND BI2 BO4
1
B2 A11
A3 B11
BI3 COMMAND BI3
B3 A13
BI4 COMMAND A4 B13
B4 BI4 BO5
A12
A5 B12
BI5 COMMAND BI5
B5
A14
A6
BI6 COMMAND BI6
B6 BO6 B14
A7 A15
BI7 COMMAND BI7
B7 B15
A8 A16
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8 BO7 B16
(N)
B17
FAIL A17
A18
B18
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL.
TB3-A2
DC (+) B2 ()
SUPPLY DC-DC
(-) B9 A1
0V COM1-B
B1 () RS485 I/F for RSM, IEC60870-5-103
A10 A3
COM1-0V
() B10 B3 ()
FRAME EARTH
E TB4-A2
CASE EARTH COM2-A
B2
A1
COM2-B
B1 RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103
A3
COM2-0V
B3
 198 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

BUSBAR
CT OUTPUT CONTACTS
TB1- TB3- SIGNAL LIST (DEFAULT)
1 B4
2 BO1 GENERAL TRIP
Core balance 3 A4
BO1 BO2 GENERAL TRIP
CT 4 A5
BO3 GENERAL TRIP
5 B5
6 IE BO4 ARC SHOT
A7
7 BO5 OC1 TRIP
CB B7
8 ISE BO2 BO6 EF1 TRIP
A6
BO7 SEF1-S1 TRIP
B6
FRAME EARTH
(P) B8
TB2- A8
A1 BO3
BI1 COMMAND BI1 A9
B1
B9
BI2 COMMAND A2
1 BI2 A10
B2
A3 B10
BI3 COMMAND BO4
BI3 A11
B3
A4 B11
BI4 COMMAND BI4
B4 A13
A5 B13
BI5 COMMAND BI5 BO5
B5 A12
A6 B12
BI6 COMMAND BI6
B6 A14
A7
BI7 COMMAND BI7 BO6 B14
B7 A15
A8 B15
BI8 COMMAND BI8
B8
A16
(N) BO7 B16
B17
FAIL A17
A18
B18
RELAY FAIL.
≥1
DD FAIL.
TB3-A2
DC (+) B2 ()
SUPPLY DC-DC
(-) B9 A1
0V COM1-B
B1 () RS485 I/F for RSM, IEC60870-5-103
A10 A3
COM1-0V
() B10 B3 ()
FRAME EARTH
E TB4-A2
CASE EARTH COM2-A
B2
A1
COM2-B
B1 RS485 I/F for IEC60870-5-103
A3
COM2-0V
B3
 199 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 200 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix H
Relay Setting Sheet
1. Relay Identification
2. Line parameter
3. Contacts setting
4. Relay setting sheet
 201 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
1. Relay Identification Date:

Relay type Serial Number
Frequency AC current
DC supply voltage
Password
Active setting group
2. Line parameter
CT ratio OC: EF: SEF:
3. Contacts setting
TB3 Terminal A5(B5)-B4, A4
Terminal A6(B6)-A7, B7
Terminal A9(B9)-B8, A8
Terminal B16-A16
 202 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
4. Relay setting sheet

№ Name Range Units Contents Default Setting of Relay Series User
(5A rating / 1A rating) Setting
5A rating 1A rating 500 520
1 Active gp. 1-4 － Active setting group 1
2 Line name Specified by user － Line name Specified by user
3 OCCT 1 -　20000 － CT ratio of OC 400
4 EFCT 1 -　20000 － CT ratio of EF －
5 OCEFCT 1 -　20000 － CT ratio of OCEF －
6 SEFCT 1 -　20000 － CT ratio of SEF － 400
7 APPL 3P/2P/1P － Application setting (400 & 420) －
8 Optime Normal/Fast － OC & EF element operating time Normal
9 AOLED Off/On ー ALARM LED lighting control at alarm output On
10 SVCNT ALM&BLK/ALM － AC input imbalance ALM&BLK
11 OC OC1EN Off/On － OC1 Enable On
12 MOC1 DT/IEC/IEEE/US/C － OC1 Delay Type (if OC1EN=On) D
13 MOC1C-IEC NI/VI/EI/LTI － OC1 IEC Inverse Curve Type (if MOC1=IEC) NI
14 MOC1C-IEEE MI/VI/EI － OC1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type (if MOC1=IEEE) MI
15 MOC1C-US CO2/CO8 － OC1 US Inverse Curve Type (if MOC1=US) CO2
16 OC1R DEF/DEP － OC1 Reset Characteristic. (if MOCI=IEEE, US or C) DEF
17 OC1-2F NA / Block － 2f Block for OC1 NA
18 OC2EN Off/On － OC2 Enable Off
19 MOC2 D/IEC/IEEE/US/C － OC2 Delay Type (if OC2EN=On) D
20 MOC2C-IEC NI/VI/EI/LTI － OC1 IEC Inverse Curve Type (if MOC1=IEC) NI
21 MOC2C-IEEE MI/VI/EI － OC1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type (if MOC1=IEEE) MI
22 MOC2C-US CO2/CO8 － OC1 US Inverse Curve Type (if MOC1=US) CO2
23 OC2R DEF/DEP － OC1 Reset Characteristic. (if MOC1=IEEE, US or C) DEF
29 UC UC1EN Off/On － UC1 Enable Off
30 UC2EN Off/On － UC2 Enable Off
31 EF EF1EN Off/On － EF1 Enable －
32 MEF1 DT/IEC/IEEE/US/C － EF1 Delay Type (if EF1EN=On) D
33 MEF1C-IEC NI/VI/EI/LTI － EF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type (if MEF1=IEC) NI
34 MEF1C-IEEE MI/VI/EI － EF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type (if MEF1=IEEE) MI
35 MEF1C-US CO2/CO8 － EF1 US Inverse Curve Type (if MEF1=US) CO2
36 EF1R DEF/DEP － EF1 Reset Characteristic. (if MEFI=IEEE, US or C) DEF
37 EF1-2F NA / Block － 2f Block for EF1 NA
38 EF2EN Off/On － EF2 Enable Off
39 MEF2 D/IEC/IEEE/US/C － EF2 Delay Type (if EF2EN=On) D
40 MEF2C-IEC NI/VI/EI/LTI － EF2 IEC Inverse Curve Type (if MEF2=IEC) NI
41 MEF2C-IEEE MI/VI/EI － EF2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type (if MEF2=IEEE) MI
42 MEF2C-US CO2/CO8 － EF2 US Inverse Curve Type (if MEF2=US) CO2
43 EF2R DEF/DEP － EF2 Reset Characteristic. (if MEF2=IEEE, US or C) DEF
45 EF3EN Off/On － EF3 Enable －
47 EF4EN Off/On － EF4 Enable －
49 SEF SE1EN Off/On － SEF1 Enable － On
50 MSE1 DT/IEC/IEEE/US/C － SEF1 Delay Type (if SE1EN=On) － D
51 MSE1C-IEC NI/VI/EI/LTI － SEF1 IEC Inverse Curve Type (if MSE1=IEC) － NI
52 MSE1C-IEEE MI/VI/EI － SEF1 IEEE Inverse Curve Type (if MSE1=IEEE) － MI
53 MSE1C-US CO2/CO8 － SEF1 US Inverse Curve Type (if MSE1=US) － CO2
54 SE1R DEF/DEP － SEF1 Reset Characteristic. (if MSE1=IEEE, US or C) － DEF
55 SE1S2 Off/On － SEF1 Stage 2 Timer Enable (if SE1EN=0n) － Off
56 SE1-2F NA / Block － 2f Block for SE1 － NA
57 SE2EN Off/On － SEF2 Enable － Off
58 MSE2 DT/IEC/IEEE/US/C － SEF2 Delay Type (if SE2EN=On) － D
59 MSE2C-IEC NI/VI/EI/LTI － SEF2 IEC Inverse Curve Type (if MSE2=IEC) － NI
60 MSE2C-IEEE MI/VI/EI － SEF2 IEEE Inverse Curve Type (if MSE2=IEEE) － MI
61 MSE2C-US CO2/CO8 － SEF2 US Inverse Curve Type (if MSE2=US) － CO2
62 SE2R DEF/DEP － SEF2 Reset Characteristic. (if MSE2=IEEE, US or C) － DEF
68 Thermal THMEN Off/On － Thermal OL Enable Off
69 THMAEN Off/On － Thermal Alarm Enable Off
 203 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

70 NPS NPS1EN Off / On － NPS1 Enable Off
71 NPS1-2F NA / Block － 2f Block for NPS1 NA
72 NPS2EN Off / On － NPS2 Enable Off
73 NPS2-2F NA / Block － 2f Block for NPS2 NA
74 BCD BCDEN Off / On － Broken Conducter Enable Off
75 BCD-2F NA / Block － 2f Block for BCD NA
76 CBF BTC Off / On － Back-trip control Off
77 RTC Off/DIR/OC － Re-trip control Off/Direct/OC controlled Off
78 Cold CLSG Off/1/2/3/4 － Cold Load settings group Off
79 Load CLDOEN Off / On － Cold Load drop-off enable Off
80 ARC ARCEN Off / On － Autoreclose Enable On
81 ARCNUM S1 / S2 / S3 / S4 / S5 － Reclosing shot max. number S1
82 ARCREQ Off / On － Autoreclose requirement Off
83 ARCFAIL Off / On － Autoreclose confirmation Off
84 COOD-OC Off / On － OC relay for Co-ordination enable Off
85 COOD-EF Off / On － EF relay for Co-ordination enable Off
86 COOD-SE Off / On － SEF relay for Co-ordination enable － Off
87 OC1-INIT NA / On / Block － Autoreclosing initiation by OC1 enable NA
88 OC1-TP1 Off / Inst / Set － OC1 trip mode of 1st trip (if OC1EN=On) set
89 OC1-TP2 Off / Inst / Set － OC1 trip mode of 2nd trip (if OC1EN=On) set
90 OC1-TP3 Off / Inst / Set － OC1 trip mode of 3rd trip (if OC1EN=On) set
91 OC1-TP4 Off / Inst / Set － OC1 trip mode of 4th trip (if OC1EN=On) set
115 EF1-INIT NA / On / Block － Autoreclosing initiation by EF1 enable NA
116 EF1-TP1 Off / Inst / Set － EF1 trip mode of 1st trip (if EF1EN=On) set
117 EF1-TP2 Off / Inst / Set － EF1 trip mode of 2nd trip (if EF1EN=On) set
118 EF1-TP3 Off / Inst / Set － EF1 trip mode of 3rd trip (if EF1EN=On) set
119 EF1-TP4 Off / Inst / Set － EF1 trip mode of 4th trip (if EF1EN=On) set
 204 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

143 SE1-INIT NA / On / Block － Autoreclosing initiation by SEF1 enable － NA
144 SE1-TP1 Off / Inst / Set － SEF1 trip mode of 1st trip (if SE1EN=On) － set
145 SE1-TP2 Off / Inst / Set － SEF1 trip mode of 2nd trip (if SE1EN=On) － set
146 SE1-TP3 Off / Inst / Set － SEF1 trip mode of 3rd trip (if SE1EN=On) － set
147 SE1-TP4 Off / Inst / Set － SEF1 trip mode of 4th trip (if SE1EN=On) － set
171 EXT-INIT NA / On / Block － Autoreclosing initiation by External Trip Command enable NA
172 OC OC1 0.2 - 25.0 0.04 - 5.00 A OC1 Threshold setting (if OC1EN=On) 5.0/1.00
173 TOC1 0.010 - 1.500 － OC1 Time multiplier setting (if MOC1=IEC, IEEE, US or C) 1.000
174 TOC1 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 Definite time setting.(if MOC1=DT) 1.00
175 TOC1R 0.0 - 300.0 s OC1 Definete time reset delay (if OC1R =DEF) 0.0
176 TOC1RM 0.010 - 1.500 － OC1 Dependent time reset time multiplier(if OC1R=DEP) 1.000
177 OC2 0.2 - 250.0 0.04 - 50.00 A OC2 Threshold setting(if OC2EN=On) 25.0/5.00
178 TOC2 0.010 - 1.500 － OC2 Time multiplier setting (if MOC2=IEC, IEEE, US or C) 1.000
179 TOC2 0.00 - 300.00 s OC2 Definite time setting.(if OC2EN=On) 0.00
180 TOC2R 0.0 - 300.0 s OC2 Definete time reset delay (if OC2R =DEF) 0.0
181 TOC2RM 0.010 - 1.500 － OC2 Dependent time reset time multiplier (if OC2R=DEP) 1.000
186 OC1-k 0.00 - 300.00 -- Configurable IDMT Curve settig of OC1.(if MOC1=C) 0.14
187 OC1-α 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto 0.02
188 OC1-C 0.000 - 5.000 -- ditto 0.000
189 OC1-kr 0.00 - 300.00 -- ditto 2.00
190 OC1-β 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto 2.00
191 OC2-k 0.00 - 300.00 -- Configurable IDMT Curve settig of OC2.(if MOC2=C) 0.14
192 OC2-α 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto 0.02
193 OC2-C 0.000 - 5.000 -- ditto 0.000
194 OC2-kr 0.00 - 300.00 -- ditto 2.00
195 OC2-β 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto 2.00
196 UC UC1 0.5 - 10.0 0.10 - 2.00 A UC1 Threshold setting(if UC1EN=On) 2.0/0.40
197 TUC1 0.00 - 300.00 s UC1 Definite time setting.(if UC1EN=On) 0.00
198 UC2 0.5 - 10.0 0.10 - 2.00 A UC2 Threshold setting (if UC2EN=On) 1.0/0.20
199 TUC2 0.00 - 300.00 s UC2 Definite time setting.(if UC2EN=On) 0.00
200 EF EF1 0.1 - 25.0 0.02 - 5.00 A EF1 Threshold setting (if EF1EN=On) －
201 TEF1 0.010 - 1.500 － EF1 Time multiplier setting(if MEF1=IEC, IEEE, US or C) －
202 TEF1 0.00 - 300.00 s EF1 Definite time setting.(if MEF1=DT) －
203 TEF1R 0.0 - 300.0 s EF1 Definite time reset delay(if EF1R =DEF) －
204 TEF1RM 0.010 - 1.500 － EF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier. (if EF1R=DEP) －
205 EF2 0.1 - 250.0 0.02 - 50.00 A EF2 Threshold setting (if EF2EN=On) －
206 TEF2 0.010 - 1.500 － EF2 Time multiplier setting (if MEF2=IEC, IEEE, US or C) －
207 TEF2 0.00 - 300.00 s EF2 Definite time setting.(if EF2EN=On) －
208 TEF2R 0.0 - 300.0 s EF2 Definite time reset delay(if EF2R =DEF) －
209 TEF2RM 0.010 - 1.500 － EF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier (if EF2R=DEP) －
210 EF3 0.2 - 250.0 0.04 - 50.00 A EF3 Threshold setting (if EF3EN=On) －
 205 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

212 EF4 0.2 - 250.0 0.04 - 50.00 A EF4 Threshold setting(if EF4EN=On) －
214 EF1-k 0.00 - 300.00 -- Configurable IDMT Curve settig of EF1(if MEF1=C) －
215 EF1-α 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto －
216 EF1-C 0.000 - 5.000 -- ditto －
217 EF1-kr 0.00 - 300.00 -- ditto －
218 EF1-β 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto －
219 EF2-k 0.00 - 300.00 -- Configurable IDMT Curve settig of EF2 (if MEF2=C) －
220 EF2-α 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto －
221 EF2-C 0.000 - 5.000 -- ditto －
222 EF2-kr 0.00 - 300.00 -- ditto －
223 EF2-β 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto －
224 SEF SE1 0.01 - 1.00 0.002 - 0.200 A SE1 Threshold setting (if SE1EN=On) － 0.50/0.100
225 TSE1 0.010 - 1.500 － SEF1 Time multiplier setting(if MSE1=IEC, IEEE, US or C) － 1.000
226 TSE1 0.00 - 300.00 s SEF1 Definite time setting.(if MSE1=DT) － 1.00
227 TSE1R 0.0 - 300.0 s SEF1 Definite time reset delay.(if SE1R =DEF) － 0.0
228 TSE1RM 0.010 - 1.500 － SEF1 Dependent time reset time multiplier. (if SE1R=DEP) － 1.000
229 TSE1S2 0.00 - 300.00 s SEF1 Stage 2 Definite time setting. － 0.00
230 SE2 0.01 - 1.00 0.002 - 0.200 A SEF2 Threshold setting (if SE2EN=On) － 2.50/0.500
231 TSE2 0.010 - 1.500 － SEF2 Time multiplier setting(if MSE2=IEC, IEEE, US or C) － 1.000
232 TSE2 0.00 - 300.00 s SEF2 Definite time setting.(if SE2EN=On) － 0.00
233 TSE2R 0.0 - 300.0 s SEF2 Definite time reset delay.(if SE2R =DEF) － 0.0
234 TSE2RM 0.010 - 1.500 － SEF2 Dependent time reset time multiplier. (if SE2R=DEP) － 1.000
235 SE3 0.01 - 1.00 0.002 - 0.200 A SEF3 Threshold setting (if SE3EN=On) － 2.50/0.500
237 SE4 0.01 - 1.00 0.002 - 0.200 A SEF4 Threshold setting.(if SE4EN=On) － 2.50/0.500
239 SE1-k 0.00 - 300.00 -- Configurable IDMT Curve settig of SE1(if MSE1=C) 0.14 0.14
240 SE1-α 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto 0.02 0.02
241 SE1-C 0.000 - 5.000 -- ditto 0.000 0.000
242 SE1-kr 0.00 - 300.00 -- ditto 2.00 2.00
243 SE1-β 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto 2.00 2.00
244 SE2-k 0.00 - 300.00 -- Configurable IDMT Curve settig of SE2 (if MSE2=C) 0.14 0.14
245 SE2-α 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto 0.02 0.02
246 SE2-C 0.000 - 5.000 -- ditto 0.000 0.000
247 SE2-kr 0.00 - 300.00 -- ditto 2.00 2.00
248 SE2-β 0.00 - 5.00 -- ditto 2.00 2.00
249 Thermal THM 2.0 - 10.0 0.40 - 2.00 A Thermal overload setting (if OLTEN=On) 5.0/1.00
250 THMIP 0.0 - 5.0 0.00 - 1.00 A Prior load setting 0.0/0.00
251 TTHM 0.5 - 500.0 min Thermal Time Constant (if OLTEN=On) 10.0
252 THMA 50 - 99 % Thermal alarm setting.(if ALTEN=On) 80
253 NPS NPS1 0.5 - 10.0 0.10 - 2.00 A NPS1 Threshold setting.(if NPS1EN=On) 2.0/0.40
254 TNPS1 0.00 - 300.00 s NPS1 Definite time setting.(if NPS1EN=On) 0.00
255 NPS2 0.5 - 10.0 0.10 - 2.00 A NPS2 Threshold setting.(if NPS2EN=On) 1.0/0.20
256 TNPS2 0.00 - 300.00 s NPS2 Definite time setting.(if NPS2EN=On) 0.00
257 BCD BCD 0.10 - 1.00 － Broken Conducter Threshold setting.(if BCDEN=On) 0.20
258 TBCD 0.00 - 300.00 s Broken Conducter Definite time setting (if BCDEN=On) 0.00
259 CBF CBF 0.5 - 10.0 0.10 - 2.00 A CBF Threshold setting.(if CBFEN=On) 2.5/0.50
260 TBTC 0.00 - 300.00 s Back trip Definite time setting 1.00
261 TRTC 0.00 - 300.00 s Re-trip Definite time setting 0.50
262 Inrush ICD-2f 10 - 50 % Sensitivity of 2f 15
263 ICDOC 0.5 - 25.0 0.10 - 5.00 A Threshold of fundamental current 0.5 / 0.10
264 Cold TCLE 0 - 10000 s Cold load enable timer. (CLSG=1,2,3,4) 100
265 Load TCLR 0 - 10000 s Cold load reset timer.(if CLSG=1,2,3,4) 100
266 ICLDO 0.5 - 10.0 0.10 - 2.00 A Cold load drop-off threshold setting.(if CLDOEN=On) 2.5/0.50
267 TCLDO 0.00 - 100.00 s Cold load drop-off timer (if CLDOEN=1) 0.00
268 ARC TRDY 0.0 - 600.0 s Reclaim timer 60.0
269 TD1 0.01 - 300.00 s 1st shot Dead timer of Stage1 10.00
270 TR1 0.01 - 310.00 s 1st shot Reset timer of Stage1 310
271 TD2 0.01 - 300.00 s 2nd shot Dead timer of Stage1 10.00
272 TR2 0.01 - 310.00 s 2nd shot Reset timer of Stage1 310
273 TD3 0.01 - 300.00 s 3rd shot Dead timer of Stage1 10.00
274 TR3 0.01 - 310.00 s 3rd shot Reset timer of Stage1 310
275 TD4 0.01 - 300.00 s 4th shot Dead timer of Stage1 10.00
276 TR4 0.01 - 310.00 s 4th shot Reset timer of Stage1 310
277 TD5 0.01 - 300.00 s 5th shot Dead timer of Stage1 10.00
278 TR5 0.01 - 310.00 s 5th shot Reset timer of Stage1 310
279 TW 0.01 - 10.00 s Out put pulse timer 2.00
280 TSUC 0.0 - 600.0 s Autoreclosing Pause Time after manually close 3.00
Autoreclosing confirmatory time after Autoreclosing
281 TFAIL 0.0 - 600.0 s 3.00
command
 206 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

282 TRCOV 0.1 - 600.0 s Autoreclosing Recovery time after Final Trip 10.0
283 TARCP 0.1 - 600.0 s Autoreclosing Pause Time after manually close 10.0
284 TRSET 0.01 - 300.00 s ARC reset time in CB closing mode. 3.00
285 OC 0.2 - 250.0 0.04 - 50.00 A For Co-ordination 5.0/1.00
286 EF 0.1 - 250.0 0.02 - 50.00 A ditto 1.5/0.30
287 SE 0.02 - 5.00 0.004 - 1.000 A ditto － 0.50/0.100
Setting of Binary Input
288 Alarm1 Text Specified by user － Alarm1 Text ALARM 1
292 BI1PUD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input 1 Pick-up delay 0.00
293 BI1DOD 0.00 - 300.00 s Binary Input 1 Drop-off delay 0.00
Repeat the following switches from binary input 2 to binary input 8.
308 BI1SNS Norm/Inv － Binary Input 1 Sense Norm
309 BI1SGS Off/1/2/3/4 － Binary Input 1 Settings Group Select Off
310 OC1BLK Off/On － OC1 Block Off
314 EF1BLK Off/On － EF1 Block －
318 SE1BLK Off/On － SEF1 Block －
322 UCBLK Off/On － Undercurrent Block Off
323 THMBLK Off/On － Thermal Protection Block Off
324 NPSBLK Off/On － NPS Block Off
325 BCDBLK Off/On － Broken Conductor Protection Block Off
326 TCFALM Off/On － Trip Circuit Fail Alarm Off
327 CBOPN Off/On － Circuit Breaker Open Off
328 CBCLS Off/On － Circuit Breaker Close Off
329 EXT3PH Off/On － External Trip - 3phase Off
330 EXTAPH Off/On － External Trip - Aphase Off
331 EXTBPH Off/On － External Trip - Bphase Off
332 EXTCPH Off/On － External Trip - Cphase Off
333 RMTRST Off/On － Remote Reset Off
334 SYNCLK Off/On － Synchronize clock Off
335 STORCD Off/On － Store Disturbance Record Off
336 Alarm1 Off/On － Alarm screen 1. Off
340 ARCBLK Off/On － ARC scheme block Off
341 ARCRDY Off/On － ARC ready Off
342 ARCINIT Off/On － ARC initiation Off
343 MNLCLS Off/On － Manual close Off
344 ARCNA Off/On － ARC not applied Off
345 ARCREQ Off/On － ARC requirement Off
 207 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

Repeat the following switches from LED 2 to LED 3.
346 Logic OR/AMD － LED1 Logic Gate Type OR
347 Reset Inst/Latch － LED1 Reset operation Inst
348 In #1 0 - 300 － LED Functions 0
349 In #2 0 - 300 － ditto 0
350 In #3 0 - 300 － ditto 0
351 In #4 0 - 300 － ditto 0
Repeat the following switches for IND2.
352 Reset Inst/Latch － IND1 Reset operation Inst
353 BIT1 0 - 300 － Virtual LED 0
354 BIT2 0 - 300 － ditto 0
355 BIT3 0 - 300 － ditto 0
356 BIT4 0 - 300 － ditto 0
357 BIT5 0 - 300 － ditto 0
358 BIT6 0 - 300 － ditto 0
359 BIT7 0 - 300 － ditto 0
360 BIT8 0 - 300 － ditto 0
361 Plant name Specified by user － Plant name Specified by user
362 Description ditto － Memorandum for user Specified by user
363 HDLC 1 - 32 － Relay ID No. for RSM 1
364 IEC 0 - 254 － Relay ID No. for IEC 2
365 IECB1 0 - 300 － IEC user specified signal 1 1
369 IECGT 0-7 － IEC General trip 1
370 IECAT 0-7 － IEC Trip A phase 1
371 IECBT 0-7 － IEC Trip B phase 1
372 IECCT 0-7 － IEC Trip C phase 1
373 IECE1 0 - 300 － IEC user event 1 0
381 IECI1 0 - 255 － IEC user INF 1 0
382 IECI2 0 - 255 － IEC user INF 2 0
383 IECI3 0 - 255 － IEC user INF 3 0
384 IECI4 0 - 255 － IEC user INF 4 0
385 IECI5 0 - 255 － IEC user INF 5 0
386 IECI6 0 - 255 － IEC user INF 6 0
387 IECI7 0 - 255 － IEC user INF 7 0
388 IECI8 0 - 255 － IEC user INF 8 0
389 Protocol HDLC/IEC － Switch for commnunications HDLC
390 232C 9.6/19.2/57.6 － ditto 9.6
391 IECBR 9.6/19.2 － ditto 19.2
392 IECBLK Normal/Blocked － ditto Normal
393 IECNFI 1.2/2.4 － ditto 2.4
394 IECGI1 No/Yes － IEC event type setting 1 No
402 BI1 comm. None/Operate/Reset/Both － BI1 command trigger setting Both
 208 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

410 Time 0.1 - 3.0 s Disturbance record 2.0
411 OC 0.5 - 250.0 0.10 - 50.00 A OC element for disturbance 10.0 / 2.00
412 EF 0.5 - 125.0 0.10 - 25.00 A EF element for disturbance －
413 SEF 0.02 - 5.00 0.004 - 1.000 A SEF element for disturbance －
414 NPS 0.5 - 10.0 0.10 - 2.00 A NPS element for disturbance 2.0 / 0.40
415 TRIP Off/On － Disturbance trigger On
416 BI Off/On － ditto On
417 OC Off/On － ditto On
418 EF Off/On － ditto －
419 SEF Off/On － ditto －
420 NPS Off/On － ditto On
421 SIG1 0 - 300 － Disturbance trigger See other sheet
422 SIG2 0 - 300 － ditto ditto
453 TCSPEN Off/On/OPT-On － Trip Circuit Supervision Emable Off
454 CBSMEN Off/On － Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Alarm Enable Off
455 TCAEN Off/On － Trip Count Alarm Enable Off
456 ΣIyAEN Off/On － ΣIy Alarm Enable Off
457 OPTAEN Off/On － Operate Time Alarm Enable Off
458 TCALM 1 - 10000 － Trip Count Alarm Threshold setting 10000
459 ΣIyALM 10 - 10000 E6 ΣIy Alarm Threshold setting 10000
460 YVALUE 1.0 - 2.0 － Y value 2.0
461 OPTALM 100 - 5000 ms Operate Time Alarm Threshold setting 1000
462 Display Pri. / Sec. / Pr-A － Metering Pri.
463 Time sync Off/BI/RSM/IEC － Time Off
 209 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Disturbance record default setting

Default setting Default setting
Name Range Unit Model 500 Model 520
NO. Signal name NO. Signal name
SIG1 0-300 － 51 OC1-A 51 OC1-A
SIG2 0-300 － 52 OC1-B 52 OC1-B
SIG3 0-300 － 53 OC1-C 53 OC1-C
SIG4 0-300 － 63 EF1 63 EF1
SIG5 0-300 － 102 OC1-A TRIP 67 SEF1
SIG6 0-300 － 103 OC1-B TRIP 102 OC1-A TRIP
SIG7 0-300 － 104 OC1-C TRIP 103 OC1-B TRIP
SIG8 0-300 － 117 EF1 TRIP 104 OC1-C TRIP
SIG9 0-300 － 141 GEN.TRIP 117 EF1 TRIP
SIG10 0-300 － 142 GEN.TRIP-A 121 SEF1-S1 TRIP
SIG11 0-300 － 143 GEN.TRIP-B 141 GEN.TRIP
SIG12 0-300 － 144 GEN.TRIP-C 142 GEN.TRIP-A
SIG13 0-300 － 145 GEN.TRIP-EF 143 GEN.TRIP-B
SIG14 0-300 － 0 144 GEN.TRIP-C
SIG15 0-300 － 0 145 GEN.TRIP-EF
SIG16 0-300 － 0 0
SIG17 0-300 － 221 ARC READY T 221 ARC READY T
SIG18 0-300 － 201 ARC BLOCK 201 ARC BLOCK
SIG19 0-300 － 223 ARC SHOT 223 ARC SHOT
SIG20 0-300 － 0 0
SIG21 0-300 － 0 0
SIG22 0-300 － 0 0
SIG23 0-300 － 0 0
SIG24 0-300 － 0 0
SIG25 0-300 － 0 0
SIG26 0-300 － 0 0
SIG27 0-300 － 0 0
SIG28 0-300 － 0 0
SIG29 0-300 － 0 0
SIG30 0-300 － 0 0
SIG31 0-300 － 0 0
User setting of Virtual LED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
IND1 [ ]
IND2 [ ]
 210 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix I
Commissioning Test Sheet (sample)
1. Relay identification
2. Preliminary check
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
3.3 AC input circuit
4. Function test
4.1 Overcurrent elements test
4.2 Operating time test (IDMT)
4.3 BCD element check
4.4 Cold load function check
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
 211 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
1. Relay identification
Type Serial number

Model System frequency
Station Date
Circuit Engineer
Protection scheme Witness
Active settings group number
2. Preliminary check
Ratings
CT shorting contacts
DC power supply
Power up
Wiring
Relay inoperative
alarm contact
Calendar and clock
3. Hardware check
3.1 User interface check
3.2 Binary input/binary output circuit check
Binary input circuit

3.3 AC input circuit
 212 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
4. Function test
4.1 Overcurrent elements test

Element Current setting Measured current
OC1-A
OC2-A
OC3-A
OC4-A
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
SEF1
SEF2
SEF3
SEF4
UC1-A
UC2-A
THM-A
THM-T
NPS1
NPS2
BCD
CBF-A
4.2 Operating time test (IDMT)

Element Curve setting Multiplier setting Measured time
OC1-A
OC2-A
EF1
EF2
SEF1
SEF2
4.3 BCD element check
4.4 Cold load function check
 213 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
5. Protection scheme test
6. Metering and recording check
7. Conjunctive test
Scheme Results
On load check
Tripping circuit
 214 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix J
Return Repair Form
 215 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
RETURN / REPAIR FORM

Please fill in this form and return it to Toshiba Corporation with the GRD110 to be repaired.
TOSHIBA CORPORATION Fuchu Complex – Power Systems & Services

1, Toshiba-cho, Fuchu-shi, Tokyo, Japan
For: Power Systems Protection & Control Department
Quality Assurance Section
Type: GRD110 Model:

(Example: Type: GRD110 Model: 500A )
Product No.:
Serial No.:
Date:
1. Reason for returning the relay

 mal-function
 does not operate
 increased error
 investigation
 others
2. Fault records, event records or disturbance records stored in the relay and relay settings are
very helpful information to investigate the incident.
Please provide relevant information regarding the incident on floppy disk, or fill in the
attached fault record sheet and relay setting sheet.
 216 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Fault Record
Date/Month/Year Time / /
/ : : .
(Example: 04/ Jul./ 2002 15:09:58.442)
Faulty phase:
Prefault values
Ia: A
Ib: A
Ic: A
IE: A
ISE: A
I1: A
I2: A
I2 / I1 :
Fault values
Ia: A
Ib: A
Ic: A
IE: A
ISE: A
I1: A
I2: A
I2 / I1 :
THM: %
 217 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
3. What was the message on the LCD display at the time of the incident?
4. Describe the details of the incident:
5. Date incident occurred

Day/Month/Year: / / /
(Example: 10/July/2002)
6. Give any comments about the GRD110, including the documents:
 218 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Customer
Name:
Company Name:
Address:
Telephone No.:
Facsimile No.:
Signature:
 219 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
 220 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix K
Technical Data
 221 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
TECHNICAL DATA
Ratings
AC current In: 1A or 5A
Frequency: 50Hz or 60Hz
DC auxiliary supply: 110/125Vdc (Operative range: 88 - 150Vdc),
220/250Vdc (Operative range: 176 - 300Vdc),
48/54/60Vdc, (Operative range: 38.4 - 72Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply:  12%
DC supply interruption:  50ms at 110V
Binary input circuit DC voltage: 110/125Vdc,
220/250Vdc,
48/54/60Vdc,
Overload Ratings
AC current inputs: 3 times rated current continuous
100 times rated current for 1 second
Burden
AC phase current inputs:  0.1VA (1A rating)
 0.3VA (5A rating)
AC earth current inputs:  0.1VA (1A rating)
AC sensitive earth inputs:  0.1VA (1A rating)
DC power supply:  10W (quiescent)
 15W (maximum)
Binary input circuit:  0.5W per input at 110Vdc
Current Transformer Requirements
Phase Inputs Typically 5P20 with rated burden according to load,
(refer to section 2.12 for detailed instructions).
Standard Earth Inputs: Core balance CT or residual connection of phase CTs.
Sensitive Earth Inputs: Core balance CT.
Phase Overcurrent Protection (OC1 – OC4)
OC 1st, 2nd Overcurrent threshold: OFF, 0.04 – 5.00A  0.01 (1A rating)
OFF, 0.2 – 25.0A  0.1 (5A rating)
Delay type: DTL, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI, or
Configurable IDMTL
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.010 - 1.500  0.001
DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s  0.01
Reset Type: Definite Time or Dependent Time.
Reset Definite Delay: 0.0 - 300.0s  0.1
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS: 0.010 - 1.500  0.001
P/F 3rd, 4th Overcurrent thresholds: OFF, 0.10 - 50.00A  0.01 (1A rating)
OFF, 0.5 -250.0A  0.1 (5A rating)
DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s  0.01
OC elements PU time (at 200% of setting): OC1 – OC4: less than 40ms, OCHS: less than 30ms
DO time (at 200% of setting) OC1 – OC4: less than 50ms, OCHS: less than 30ms
Note: PU/DO time is including PU/DO time (around 10ms) of binary output contact.
 222 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Earth Fault Protection

E/F 1st, 2nd Overcurrent threshold: OFF, 0.02 – 5.00A  0.01 (1A rating)
OFF, 0.1 – 25.0A  0.1 (5A rating)
Delay type: DTL, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI, or
Configurable IDMTL
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS: 0.010 - 1.500  0.001
DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s  0.01
Reset Definite. Delay: 0.0 - 300.0s  0.01
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS: 0.010 - 1.500  0.001
E/F 3rd, 4th thresholds: OFF, 0.04 - 50.00A  0.01 (1A rating)
OFF, 0.2 - 250.0A  0.1 (5A rating)
DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s  0.01
EF elements PU time (at 200% of setting): EF1 – EF4: less than 40ms, EFHS: less than 30ms
DO time (at 200% of setting): EF1 – EF4: less than 50ms, EFHS: less than 30ms
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
SEF 1st, 2nd Overcurrent threshold: OFF, 0.002 - 0.200A  0.001 (1A rating)
OFF, 0.01 - 1.00A  0.01 (5A rating)
Delay Type: DTL, IEC NI, IEC VI, IEC EI, UK LTI, IEEE MI,
IEEE VI, IEEE EI, US CO8 I, US CO2 STI
IDMTL TMS: 0.010 - 1.500  0.001
DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s  0.01
Reset Def. Delay: 0.0 - 300.0s  0.01
RTMS: 0.010 - 1.500  0.001
SEF1 Stage 2 DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s  0.01
SEF 3rd, 4th thresholds (GRD110-110A only): OFF, 0.004 - 1.000A  0.001 (1A rating)
OFF, 0.02 - 5.00A  0.01 (5A rating)
DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s  0.01
SEF element PU time (at 200% of setting): SEF1 – SEF4: less than 80ms, SEFHS: less than 70ms
DO time (at 200% of setting): SEF1 – SEF4: less than 90ms, SEFHS: less than 30ms
Phase Undercurrent Protection
Undercurrent 1st, 2nd threshold: OFF, 0.10 - 2.00A  0.01 (1A rating)
OFF, 0.5 - 10.0A  0.1 (5A rating)
DTL Delay: 0.00 - 300.00s  0.01
Thermal Overload Protection
IAOL = k.IFLC (Thermal setting): OFF, 0.40 - 2.00A  0.01 (1A rating)
OFF, 2.0 - 10.0A  0.1 (5A rating)
Time constant (τ): 0.5 - 500.0mins  0.1
Thermal alarm: OFF, 50% to 99% Δ 1
Negative Phase Sequence Protection
NPS 1st, 2nd threshold: OFF, 0.10 - 2.00A  0.01 (1A rating)
OFF, 0.5 - 10.0A  0.1 (5A rating)
DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s  0.01
Broken Conductor Protection
Broken conductor threshold (I2/I1): OFF, 0.10 - 1.00  0.01
DTL delay: 0.00 - 300.00s  0.01
 223 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
CBF Protection
CBF threshold: OFF, 0.10 - 2.00x In Δ 0.05
CBF stage 1 (Backup trip) DTL: 0.00 - 300.00s Δ 0.01
CBF stage 2 (Re-trip) DTL: 0.00 - 300.00s Δ 0.01
CBF element PU time and DO time: PU time: less than 20ms
DO time: less than 20ms
Autoreclose
ARC Reclaim Time 0.0– 600.0s in 0.1s steps
Close Pulse Width 0.01 – 10.00s in 0.01s steps
Lock-out Recovery Time OFF, 0.1 – 600.0s in 0.1s steps
Sequences 1 – 5 Shots to Lock-out, each trip programmable for
inst or Delayed operation
Dead Times(programmable for each shot) 0.01 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset Times(programmable for each shot) 0.01 – 310.00s in 0.01s steps
Accuracy
Overcurrent Pick-ups: 100% of setting  5%
Overcurrent PU/DO ratio: 100%, CBF element: 125%
Undercurrent Pick-up: 100% of setting  5%
Undercurrent PU/DO ratio: 100%
Inverse Time Delays:  5% or 30ms (1.5  I/Is  30)
Definite Time Delays:  1% or 10ms
Transient Overreach for instantaneous elements: <5% for X/R = 100.
Frequency variation: < 5% ( 5% variation of rated frequency)
Communication port - local PC (RS232)
Connection: Point to point
Cable type: Multi-core (straight)
Cable length: 15m (max.)
Connector: RS232C 9-way D-type female
Communication port - remote PC (RS485)
Connection: Multidrop (max. 32 relays)
Cable type: Twisted pair
Cable length: 1200m (max.)
Connector: Screw terminals
Isolation: 1kVac for 1 min.
Transmission rate: 64kpbs for RSM system
9.6, 19.2kbps for IEC870-5-103
Binary Inputs
Number: 8
PU voltage: Typical 74Vdc(min.70Vdc) for 110V/125Vdc rating
Typical 138Vdc(min.125Vdc) for 220V/250Vdc rating
DO voltage: PU voltage  20Vdc
Response time: Less than 8ms
Binary Outputs
Number 8
PU time: Less than 10ms
Contact ratings: Make and carry: 4A continuously
Make and carry: 10A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R5ms)
Break: 0.1A, 220Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Durability: Make and carry: 10000 operations
Break: 100000 operations
 224 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
DC Supply Monitoring
Threshold of DC power fail: Typical 74Vdc(min.70Vdc) for 110V/125Vdc rating
Typical 138Vdc(min.125Vdc) for 220V/250Vdc rating
Typical 31Vdc(min. 28Vdc) for 48Vdc rating
Mechanical design
Weight 4.5 kg
Case color Munsell No. 10YR8/0.5
Installation Flush mounting
 225 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE
Test Standards Details
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC60068-2-1/2 Operating range: -10C to +55C.
Storage / Transit: -25C to +70C.
Humidity IEC60068-2-78 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.
Enclosure Protection IEC60529 IP51 (Rear: IP20)
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC60255-5 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC60255-5 Three positive and three negative impulses of 5kV(peak),
1.2/50s, 0.5J between all terminals and between all
terminals and earth.
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency Disturbance IEC60255-22-1 Class 3, 1MHz 2.5kV applied to all ports in common mode.
/ Damped Oscillatory Wave IEC61000-4-12 / 1MHz 1.0kV applied to all ports in differential mode.
EN61000-4-12
Electrostatic Discharge IEC60255-22-2 Class 3, 6kV contact discharge, 8kV air discharge.
IEC61000-4-2 / EN61000-4-2
Radiated RF IEC60255-22-3 Class 3, Field strength 10V/m for frequency sweeps of 80MHz to
Electromagnetic Disturbance IEC61000-4-3 / EN61000-4-3 1GHz and 1.7GHz to 2.2GHz. Additional spot tests at 80,
160, 450, 900 and 1890MHz.
Fast Transient Disturbance IEC60255-22-4, 4kV, 2.5kHz, 5/50ns applied to all inputs.
IEC61000-4-4 / EN61000-4-4
Surge Immunity IEC60255-22-5, 1.2/50s surge in common/differential modes:
IEC61000-4-5 / EN61000-4-5 HV ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)
PSU and I/O ports: 2kV/1kV (peak)
RS485 port: 1kV (peak)
Conducted RF IEC60255-22-6 Class 3, 10Vrms applied over frequency range 150kHz to 100MHz.
Electromagnetic Disturbance IEC61000-4-6 / EN61000-4-6 Additional spot tests at 27 and 68MHz.
Power Frequency IEC60255-22-7, 300V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in common mode.
Disturbance IEC61000-4-16 / 150V 50Hz for 10s applied to ports in differential mode.
EN61000-4-16 Not applicable to AC inputs.
Conducted and Radiated IEC60255-25, Conducted emissions:
Emissions EN55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB (mean)
IEC61000-6-4 / EN61000-6-4 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions (at 30m):
30 to 230MHz: <30dB
230 to 1000MHz: <37dB
European Commission Directives
89/336/EEC Compliance with the European Commission
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is demonstrated
according to EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4.
73/23/EEC Compliance with the European Commission Low Voltage
Directive is demonstrated according to EN 50178 and EN
60255-5.
 226 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix L
Symbols Used in Scheme Logic
 227 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
Signal names
Marked with : Measuring element output signal
Marked with : Binary signal input from or output to the external equipment
Marked with [ ] : Scheme switch
Marked with " " : Scheme switch position
Unmarked : Internal scheme logic signal
AND gates
A A B C Output
B & Output 1 1 1 1
C Other cases 0
A A B C Output
B & Output 1 1 0 1
C Other cases 0
A A B C Output
B Output 1 0 0 1
&
C Other cases 0
OR gates
A A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 0 0 0
C Other cases 1
A A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 0 1 0
C Other cases 1
A A B C Output
B 1 Output 0 1 1 0
C Other cases 1
 228 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
XOR gates
A B Output
A
0 1 1
=1 Output
1 0 1
B
Other cases 0
Signal inversion
A Output
A 1 Output
0 1
1 0
Timer
t 0
Delayed pick-up timer with fixed setting
XXX: Set time
XXX
0
Delayed drop-off timer with fixed setting
t
XXX: Set time
XXX
t 0 Delayed pick-up timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY: Setting range
XXX - YYY
0 t Delayed drop-off timer with variable setting

XXX - YYY
One-shot timer
A
A Output
Output
XXX - YYY

Flip-flop
S R Output
S 0 0 No change
F/F Output
R 1 0 1
0 1 0
1 1 0
 229 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Scheme switch
A Switch Output
A Output 1 ON 1
ON Other cases 0
Switch Output
 Output
ON ON 1
OFF 0
 230 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix M
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
 231 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
IEC60870-5-103: Interoperability
1. Physical Layer
1.1 Electrical interface: EIA RS-485
Number of loads, 32 for one protection equipment
1.2 Optical interface
Glass fibre (option)
ST type connector (option)
1.3 Transmission speed
User setting: 9600 or 19200 bit/s
2. Application Layer
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)
3. IEC60870-5-103 Interface
3.1 Spontaneous events
The events created by the relay will be sent using Function type (FUN) / Information numbers
(INF) to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. 8 wide-use events are provided.
3.2 General interrogation
The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the Function types and Information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are shown in the table below.
3.3 Cyclic measurements
The relay will produce measured values using Type ID=3 and 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll. The rate at which the relay produces new measured
values is 2 seconds.
It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of either
1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value of the analog value. Either 1.2 or 2.4 can be selected by the
“IECNFI” setting.
3.4 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in the table below. The relay will respond to
other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative
acknowledgement of a command.
3.5 Test mode
In test mode, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values, intended for processing in
the control system, are designated by means of the CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION ‘test mode’.
This means that CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7 ‘test mode’ is used for messages normally
transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103.
 232 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
3.6 Blocking of monitor direction

If the blocking of the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications
and measurands are no longer transmitted.
For details, refer to the standard IEC60870-5-103.
4. List of Information
 233 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
List of Information
Type
INF Description Contents GI COT FUN
ID
Standard Information numbers in monitor direction
System Function
0 End of General Interrogation Transmission completion of GI items. -- 8 10 255
0 Time Synchronization Time Synchronization ACK. -- 6 8 255
2 Reset FCB Reset FCB(toggle bit) ACK -- 5 3 160
3 Reset CU Reset CU ACK -- 5 4 160
4 Start/Restart Relay start/restart -- 5 5 160
5 Pow er On Relay pow er on. Not supported
Status Indications
If it is possible to use auto-recloser, this item is set active, if 1, 7, 9,
16 Auto-recloser active GI 1 160
impossible, inactive. 11,12, 20, 21
If protection using telecommunication is available, this item is set to
17 Teleprotection active Not supported
active. If not, set to inactive.
If the protection is available, this item is set to active. If not, set to 1, 7, 9, 12,
18 Protection active GI 1 160
inactive. 20, 21
1, 7, 11, 12,
19 LED reset Reset of latched LEDs -- 1 160
20, 21
Block the 103 transmission from a relay to control system. IECBLK:
20 Monitor direction blocked GI 1 9, 11 160
"Blocked" setting.
Transmission of testmode situation froma relay to control system.
21 Test mode GI 1 9, 11 160
IECTST: "ON" setting.
When a setting change has done at the local, the event is sent to
22 Local parameter Setting Not supported
control system.
1, 7, 9, 11,
23 Characteristic1 Setting group 1 active GI 1 160
12, 20, 21
1, 7, 9, 11,
12, 20, 21
1, 7, 9, 11,
12, 20, 21
1, 7, 9, 11,
12, 20, 21
27 Auxiliary input1 User specified signal 1 (Signal specified by IECB1: ON) (*1) GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
Supervision Indications
32 Measurand supervision I Zero sequence current supervision GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
33 Measurand supervision V Zero sequence voltage supervision Not supported
35 Phase sequence supervision Negative sequence voltage supevision Not supported
36 Trip circuit supervision Output circuit supervision GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
37 I>>backup operation Not supported
38 VT fuse failure VT failure Not supported
39 Teleprotection disturbed CF(Communication system Fail) supervision Not supported
46 Group w arning Only alarming GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
47 Group alarm Trip blocking and alarming GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
Earth Fault Indications

48 Earth Fault L1 A phase earth fault (*2) GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
49 Earth Fault L2 B phase earth fault (*2) GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
50 Earth Fault L3 C phase earth fault (*2) GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
51 Earth Fault Fw d Earth fault forw ard (*2) Not supported
52 Earth Fault Rev Earth fault reverse (*2) Not supported
 234 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Type
ID
Fault Indications
64 Start/pick-up L1 A phase, A-B phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 160
65 Start/pick-up L2 B phase, A-B phase or B-C phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 160
66 Start/pick-up L3 C phase, B-C phase or C-A phase element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 160
67 Start/pick-up N Earth fault element pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 160
68 General trip BO status specified by IECGT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 60
69 Trip L1 BO status specified by IECAT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 160
70 Trip L2 BO status specified by IECBT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 160
71 Trip L3 BO status specified by IECCT: ON (*1) -- 2 1, 7 160
72 Trip I>>(back-up) Back up trip Not supported
Fault location (prim. [ohm] / second. [ohm] / km selectable by
73 Fault location X In ohms Not supported
IECFL)
74 Fault forward/line Forward fault Not supported
75 Fault reverse/Busbar Reverse fault Not supported
Teleprotection Signal
76 Carrier signal sending Not supported
transmitted
77 Teleprotection Signal received Carrier signal receiving Not supported
78 Zone1 Zone 1 trip Not supported

84 General Start/Pick-up Any elements pick-up GI 2 1, 7, 9 160
85 Breaker Failure CBF trip or CBF retrip -- 2 1, 7 160
86 Trip measuring system L1 Not supported
89 Trip measuring system E Not supported
90 Trip I> Inverse time OC trip (OC1 trip) -- 2 1, 7 160
91 Trip I>> Definite time OC trip (OR logic of OC1 to OC3 trip) -- 2 1, 7 160
Inverse time earth fault OC trip (OR logic of EF1 and SEF1
92 Trip IN> -- 2 1, 7 160
trip)
Definite time earth fault OC trip (OR logic of EF1 to EF3 and
93 Trip IN>> -- 2 1, 7 160
SEF1 to SEF3 trip)
Autoreclose indications
128 CB 'ON' by Autoreclose CB close command output -- 1 1, 7 160
CB 'ON' by long-time
129 Not supported
Autoreclose
130 Autoreclose Blocked Autoreclose block GI 1 1, 7, 9 160
Note (*1): Not available if the setting is "0".

(2): Not available when neither EF nor SEF element is used.
 235 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Type
ID
IECG1
IECI1 User specified 1 Signal specified by IECE1: ON (*1) 2 1, 7 160
(yes/no)
IECG2
(yes/no)
IECG3
(yes/no)
IECG4
(yes/no)
IECG5
(yes/no)
IECG6
(yes/no)
IECG7
(yes/no)
IECG8
(yes/no)
Measurands(*3)
144 Measurand I <meaurand I> -- 3.1 2, 7 160
145 Measurand I,V Ib measurand <meaurand I> -- 3.2 2, 7 160
146 Measurand I,V,P,Q Ib measurand <meaurand I> -- 3.3 2, 7 160
147 Measurand IN,VEN Ie, Io measurand <meaurand I> -- 3.4 2, 7 160
Measurand IL1,2,3, VL1,2,3,
148 Ia, Ib, Ic measurand <meaurand II> -- 9 2, 7 160
P,Q,f
Generic Function
240 Read Headings Not supported
Read attributes of all entries of
241 Not supported
a group
243 Read directory of entry Not supported
244 Real attribute of entry Not supported
245 End of GGI Not supported
249 Write entry w ith confirm Not supported
250 Write entry w ith execute Not supported
251 Write entry aborted Not supported
Note (3): depends on relay model as follows:
Type ID=3.1 Type ID=3.2 Type ID=3.3 Type ID=3.4

Model /APPL (INF=144) (INF=145) (INF=146) (INF=147)
IL2 IL2 VL1-VL2 IL2 VL1-VL2 3-phase P 3-phase Q IN VEN
Model 500or/520/APPL=1P 0 0 - 0 - - - Ie -
Model 500or/520/APPL=2P 0 0 - 0 - - - Ie -
Model 500or/520/APPL=3P Ib Ib - Ib - - - Ie -
Type ID=9
Model /APPL (INF=148)
IL1 IL2 IL3 VL1 VL2 VL3 3-phase P 3-phase Q f
Model 500or/520/APPL=1P 0 0 0 - - - - - -
Model 500or/520/APPL=2P Ia 0 Ic - - - - - -
Model 500or/520/APPL=3P Ia Ib Ic - - - - - -
Above values are normalized by IECNFI.
 236 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Type
INF Description Contents COM COT FUN
ID
Selection of standard information numbers in control direction
System functions
Initiation of general
0 -- 7 9 160
interrogation
0 Time synchronization -- 6 8 160
General commands
16 Auto-recloser on/off ON/OFF 20 20 160
17 Teleprotection on/off -- 20 20 160
18 Protection on/off (*4) ON/OFF 20 20 160
19 LED reset Reset indication of latched LEDs. ON 20 20 160
23 Activate characteristic 1 Setting Group 1 ON 20 20 160
Generic functions
Read headings of all defined
240 Not supported
groups
Read values or attributes of all
241 Not supported
entries of one group
Read directory of a single
243 Not supported
entry
Read values or attributes of a
244 Not supported
single entry
General Interrogation of
245 Not supported
generic data
248 Write entry Not supported
249 Write entry with confirmation Not supported
250 Write entry with execution Not supported
251 Write entry abort Not supported
Note (4): While the relay receives the "Protection off" command, " IN SERVICE LED" is off.
GRD110
Description Contents Comment
supported
Basic application functions
Test mode Yes
Blocking of monitor direction Yes
Disturbance data No
Generic services No
Private data Yes
Miscellaneous
Max. MVAL = rated
Measurand
value times
Current L1 Ia 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFI setting
Current L2 Ib 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFI setting
Current L3 Ic 1,2 or 2,4 IECNFI setting
Voltage L1-E Va No
Voltage L2-E Vb No
Voltage L3-E Vc No
Active power P P No
Reactive power Q Q No
Frequency f f No
Voltage L1 - L2 Vab No
 237 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
[Legend]
GI: General Interrogation
Type ID: Type Identification (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.1)
1 : time-tagged message
2 : time-tagged message with relative time
3 : measurands I
4 : time-tagged measurands with relative time
5 : identification
6 : time synchronization
8 : general interrogation termination
9 : measurands II
10: generic data
11: generic identification
20: general command
23: list of recorded disturbances
26: ready for transmission for disturbance data
27: ready for transmission of a channel
28: ready for transmission of tags
29: transmission of tags
30: transmission of disturbance values
31: end of transmission
COT: Cause of Transmission (refer to IEC60870-5-103 section 7.2.3)
1: spontaneous
2: cyclic
3: reset frame count bit (FCB)
4: reset communication unit (CU)
5: start / restart
6: power on
7: test mode
8: time synchronization
9: general interrogation
10: termination of general interrogation
11: local operation
12: remote operation
20: positive acknowledgement of command
21: negative acknowledgement of command
31: transmission of disturbance data
40: positive acknowledgement of generic write command
41: negative acknowledgement of generic write command
42: valid data response to generic read command
43: invalid data response to generic read command
44: generic write confirmation
 238 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix N
Inverse Time Characteristics
 239 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (NI) IEC/UK Inv erse Curv es (VI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5) (T ime M ultiplier T M S = 0.1 -
100 100
(s )
10
Ti m e
10
Operating Time (s)
O pe ra ti ng
TMS T M S
1.5 1 1 . 5
1 . 0
1.
0 . 5
0.5
1
0 . 2
0.1
0.2 0 . 1
0.1
0.1 0.01
1 10 100 1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting) Current (M ultiple of Setting
Normal Inverse Very Inverse
 240 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
IEC/UK Inverse Curves (EI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
1000
100
U K I n v e r s e C u r v e s ( L T I )
( T i m e M u l t i p l i e r T M S = 0 . 1 -
1000
10
Operating Time (s)
(s)
T i me
100
Op er ati n g
1
T M S
TMS
10 1 . 5
1.5 1.0
1.0
0 . 5
0.1 0.5
0 . 2
1
0 . 1
0.2
0.1
0.01 0 . 1
1 10 100 1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting) C u r r e n t ( M u l t i p l e o f S e t t i n g
Extremely Inverse Long Time Inverse
 241 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
IEEE Inverse Curves (MI) I E E E I n v e r s e C u r v e s ( V I )

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5) ( T i m e M u l t i p l i e r T M S = 0 . 1 - 1
100 100
( s )
10 10
T i m e
Operating Time (s)
O p e r a t i n g
TMS
TM
1.5
1 1
1.0 1.5
1.0
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.1 0 . 1 0.2
0.1
0.1
0.01 0 . 0 1
1 10 100 1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting) C u r r e n t ( M u l t i p l e o f S e t t i n g )
Moderately Inverse Very Inverse
 242 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
IEEE Inverse Curves (EI)

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5)
100
10
Operating Time (s)
TMS
1.5
1.0
0.1
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.01
1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting)
Extremely Inverse
 243 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
US Inverse Curves (CO8) U S I n v e r s e C u r v e s ( C O 2 )

(Time Multiplier TMS = 0.1 - 1.5) ( T i m e M u l t i p l i e r T M S = 0 . 1 - 1 . 5
100 10
( s )
10
T i m e
1
T M S
O p e r a t i n g
Operating Time (s)
1.5
1 1.0
TMS
0.5
1.5
0 . 1
1.0
0.2
0.1 0.5
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.01 0 . 0 1
1 10 100 1 10 100
Current (Multiple of Setting) C u r r e n t ( M u l t i p l e o f S e t t i n g )
CO8 Inverse CO2 Short Time Inverse
 244 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Appendix O
Ordering
 245 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Ordering
GRD110 A
Type:
Overcurrent Relay GRD110
Model:
-Model 500: Three phase and earth fault protection with 500
autoreclose function
-Model 420: Three phase, earth and sensitive earth fault 520
protection with autoreclose function
CT Rating:
1A 1
5A 2
Frequency:
50Hz 1
60Hz 2
DC auxiliary supply rating:
110V/125V 1
220V/250V 2
48V 3
Rear communication port:
RS485 1
Fibre optic 2
Dual RS485 3
LED label
Standard None
Option: User configurable LED label J
 246 
6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8
Version-up Records
Version Date Revised Section Contents
No.
0.0 Apr. 18, 2007 -- First issue
0.1 Oct., 2, 2017 -- Republished under spin-off company
 247 

GRD110 5xxx 6F2S0858 0.1r

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GRD110 5xxx 6F2S0858 0.1r

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GRD110 5xxx 6F2S0858 0.1r

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

6 F 2 S 0 8 5 8

OVERCURRENT PROTECTION RELAY

© Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2017

Explanation of symbols used

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in death or

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in death or

3.2.2 Binary Input Signals 66

6.4 Hardware Tests 139

Appendix A Programmable Reset Characteristics and Implementation of Thermal

Table 1.1.1 Series Members and Functions

Model Number GRD110 -

DT: definite time

2.1.1 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection

Figure 2.1.1 Time-distance Characteristics of Inverse Time Protection

Is = overcurrent setting (amps),

IEC/UK Inverse Curves IEEE/US Inverse Curves

Current (Multiple of Setting) Current (Multiple of Setting)

Figure 2.1.2 IDMT Characteristics

Programmable Reset Characteristics

Definite time reset

element returns to its reset condition.

Dependent time reset

Figure 2.1.3 illustrates the dependent time reset characteristics.

Table 2.1.1 Specification of IDMT Curves

Curve Description IEC ref. k  c kr 

IEEE Reset Curves

Figure 2.1.3 Dependent Time Reset Characteristics

2.1.2 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

Figure 2.1.4 Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

2.1.3 Scheme Logic

Figure 2.1.5 Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection OC1

Figure 2.1.6 Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection EF1

Element Range Step Default Remarks

Settings for Inverse Time Overcurrent protection

Figure 2.1.7 Current Settings in Radial Feeder

Settings of Definite Time Overcurrent protection

2.2 Instantaneous and Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

2.2.1 Selective Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection

Figure 2.2.1 Conjunction of Inverse and Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection

2.2.2 Staged Definite Time Overcurrent Protection

Figure 2.2.2 Feeder Protection Coordinated with Fuses

Figure 2.2.3 Staged Definite Time Protection

2.2.3 Scheme Logic

Figure 2.2.4 Phase Overcurrent Protection OC2

Figure 2.2.5 Phase Overcurrent Protection OC3

Figure 2.2.6 Phase Overcurrent Protection OC4

Figure 2.2.7 Earth fault Protection EF2

Figure 2.2.8 Earth fault Protection EF3

Figure 2.2.9 Earth fault Protection EF4

Element Range Step Default Remarks

2.3 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection

Standby earth fault protection

Restricted earth fault protection

Figure 2.3.1 High Impedance REF

Figure 2.3.2 Inverse Time or Definite Time SEF Protection SEF1

Figure 2.3.3 Inverse Time or Definite Time SEF Protection SEF2

Figure 2.3.4 Definite Time SEF Protection SEF3

Figure 2.3.5 Definite Time SEF Scheme Logic

Element Range Step Default Remarks